Chevrolet | 2006 Cobalt | Specifications | Chevrolet 2006 Cobalt Specifications

2006 Chevrolet Cobalt Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1
Front Seats ............................................... 1-2
Rear Seats .............................................. 1-10
Safety Belts ............................................. 1-12
Child Restraints
....................................... 1-32
Airbag System
......................................... 1-53
Restraint System Check
............................ 1-68
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1
Keys
........................................................ 2-2
Doors and Locks
....................................... 2-7
Windows ................................................. 2-12
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-14
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
........... 2-17
Mirrors .................................................... 2-33
OnStar® System
...................................... 2-35
Storage Areas
......................................... 2-37
Sunroof
.................................................. 2-38
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4
Climate Controls
...................................... 3-17
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators
........ 3-22
Driver Information Center (DIC)
.................. 3-38
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-48
M
Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle
..... 4-2
Towing
................................................... 4-36
Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Service ..................................................... 5-3
Fuel ......................................................... 5-5
Checking Things Under the Hood
............... 5-10
Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 5-46
Bulb Replacement
.................................... 5-49
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......... 5-55
Tires
...................................................... 5-56
Appearance Care
..................................... 5-88
Vehicle Identification
................................. 5-96
Electrical System ...................................... 5-97
Capacities and Specifications
................... 5-107
.....................................
6-1
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
Customer Assistance and Information .............. 7-1
Customer Assistance and Information
........... 7-2
Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-13
Index ................................................................ 1
Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, and the
name COBALT are registered trademarks of General
Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time
it was printed. We reserve the right to make changes
after that time without further notice. For vehicles
first sold in Canada, substitute the name “General
Motors of Canada Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division
whenever it appears in this manual.
Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be there if it is
needed while you are on the road. If the vehicle is sold,
leave this manual in the vehicle.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 06COBALT B Second Printing
ii
How to Use This Manual
Many people read the owner manual from beginning to
end when they first receive their new vehicle. If this is
done, it can help you learn about the features and
controls for the vehicle. Pictures and words work
together in the owner manual to explain things.
Index
A good place to quickly locate information about the
vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is
an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and
the page number where it can be found.
©
2005 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book. We
use a box and the word CAUTION to tell about things
that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Do Not,”
“Do Not do this” or “Do Not
let this happen.”
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you do not,
you or others could be hurt.
iii
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this manual you will find these notices:
The vehicle has components and labels that use symbols
instead of text. Symbols are shown along with the text
describing the operation or information relating to a
specific component, control, message, gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. But
the notice will tell what to do to help avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage, or indicator, reference the following
topics:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
Features and Controls in Section 2
Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
Climate Controls in Section 3
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in Section 3
Audio System(s) in Section 3
Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
v
✍ NOTES
vi
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ......................................................1-2
Manual Seats ................................................1-2
Driver Seat Height Adjuster ..............................1-3
Manual Lumbar ..............................................1-3
Heated Seats .................................................1-4
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-4
Head Restraints .............................................1-7
Easy Entry Seat (Coupe) .................................1-8
Rear Seats .....................................................1-10
Split Folding Rear Seat .................................1-10
Safety Belts ...................................................1-12
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................1-12
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......1-16
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-17
Driver Position ..............................................1-18
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment .....................1-24
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-25
Right Front Passenger Position .......................1-25
Rear Seat Passengers ..................................1-25
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ....................1-28
Safety Belt Pretensioners ...............................1-31
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-31
Child Restraints .............................................1-32
Older Children ..............................................1-32
Infants and Young Children ............................1-34
Child Restraint Systems .................................1-38
Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-42
Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children (LATCH) .................................1-43
Securing a Child Restraint in
a Rear Seat Position .................................1-48
Securing a Child Restraint in
the Right Front Seat Position ......................1-50
Airbag System ...............................................1-53
Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-56
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-59
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-60
How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-60
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .....1-61
Passenger Sensing System ............................1-62
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-66
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............................1-67
Restraint System Check ..................................1-68
Checking the Restraint Systems ......................1-68
Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash ...1-68
1-1
Front Seats
Manual Seats
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
1-2
Lift the bar located under the front of the seat to unlock it.
Slide the seat to where you want it and release the bar.
Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat is
locked in place.
Driver Seat Height Adjuster
Manual Lumbar
If your vehicle has this
feature, the knob is
located on the front of the
driver seat lower cushion
on the inboard side.
Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase
or decrease the lumbar support.
The driver’s seat height adjuster is located on the
outboard side of the seat.
To raise the seat, move the lever upward repeatedly
until the seat is at the desired height. To lower the seat,
move the lever downward repeatedly until the seat is
at the desired height.
1-3
Heated Seats
Reclining Seatbacks
Your vehicle may have heated front seats. The switches
are located on the instrument panel above the climate
control system.
Press the side of the
switch with the double
indicator lights to turn on
the heated seat at the
highest setting.
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
{CAUTION:
Driver’s Switch Shown,
Passenger’s Switch
Similar
Both indicator lights will be lit to indicate that the setting
is on high. Press the side of the switch with the single
indicator light to go to the low setting. The indicator light
will be lit to indicate that the setting is on low. Return
the switch to the center to turn off the heated seat.
If your vehicle has been turned off, the last heated seat
setting will be retained when the vehicle is started again.
1-4
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
Your seats have manual reclining seatbacks. The lever
used to operate them is located on the outboard
side of the seats.
To return the seatback to an upright position, do the
following:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the
seatback and the seatback will return to the upright
position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
To recline the seatback, do the following:
1. Lift the recline lever.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
1-5
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it
will not be against your body. Instead, it will be
in front of you. In a crash, you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
1-6
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash,
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
Head Restraints
Pull the head restraint up to
raise it. To lower the head
restraint, press the button,
located on the top of the
seatback, and push the
restraint down.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is at the same height as the top of the occupant’s head.
This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in
a crash.
1-7
Easy Entry Seat (Coupe)
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If the easy entry right front seat is not locked,
it can move. In a sudden stop or crash, the
person sitting there could be injured. After you
have used it, be sure to push rearward on an
easy entry seat to be sure it is locked.
1-8
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
The front passenger seat can be used to easily get in
and out of the rear seat.
To use the easy entry seat, do the following:
2. Tilt the seatback forward completely while pushing
the seat forward.
3. Move the seatback to its original position after
someone gets into the rear seat area. Make
sure the seatback is locked.
4. Move the seat rearward until it locks into place.
1. Push down the easy entry seat handle located on
the rear of the seatback on the outboard side to
release the seatback.
1-9
Rear Seats
Split Folding Rear Seat
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
You can fold either side of the rear seatback down for
more cargo space.
To lower the rear seatback, follow these steps:
2. Once the handle is pulled, the seatback can be
pushed open through the trunk, or pulled down
from the inside of the vehicle.
1. Open the trunk and pull one or both of the small
handles located in the center of the trunk.
1-10
To raise the rear seatback, lift it up and push rearward
until you hear a click. Push and pull on the seatback
to be sure it is locked into place.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
pull forward on the top of the seatback at the
area of the latch to be sure it is locked.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
1-11
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.
1-12
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has indicators to remind you and your
passengers to buckle your safety belts. See Safety Belt
Reminder Light on page 3-24 and Passenger Safety
Belt Reminder Light on page 3-25.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
says to wear safety belts. Here is why: They work.
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter...a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat
on wheels.
1-13
Put someone on it.
1-14
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.
The rider does not stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
1-15
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident
if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you are upside down. And your chance
of being conscious during and after an accident,
so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater
if you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-16
A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will be
in most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of them. Every airbag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you are in a vehicle that has
airbags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That is true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in an
accident — even one that is not your fault — you
and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-32
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-34. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you will want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We will start with the driver position.
Safety belts are for everyone.
1-17
Driver Position
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to wear
it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see
how, see “Seats” in the Index.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-31.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to the height
that is right for you. Improper shoulder belt height
adjustment could reduce the effectiveness of the
safety belt in a crash. See Shoulder Belt Height
Adjustment on page 1-24.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
1-18
6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-19
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-20
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not at the
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-21
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-22
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-23
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt height
adjuster to the height that is right for you.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is
centered on your shoulder. The belt should be away from
your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
Incorrect positioning of the shoulder belt can reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
To move it down, press
the release button (A) and
move the height adjuster
to the desired position.
You can move the height
adjuster up just by pushing
up on the shoulder
belt guide.
After you move the height adjuster to where you want it,
try to move it down without pressing the release button to
make sure it has locked into position.
1-24
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Right Front Passenger Position
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
belt properly, see Driver Position on page 1-18.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt — except for one thing.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all the
way, you will engage the child restraint locking feature
which may turn off the passenger’s frontal airbag.
If this happens, just let the belt go back all the way and
start again.
Rear Seat Passengers
It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in
the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those
who are wearing safety belts.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more
likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
1-25
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts. Here is
how to wear one properly.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way,
it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and
start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-31.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across
you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back
slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder part.
1-26
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a
crash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out of
the retractor.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
1-27
There is one guide for each outboard passenger
position in the rear seat. Here is how to install a comfort
guide and use the safety belt:
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt
away from the neck and head.
1-28
1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of
the seatback and the interior body to remove the
guide from its storage clip.
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic
cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide
over the belt, and insert the two edges of the
belt into the slots of the guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
1-29
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described in Rear Seat Passengers on page 1-25.
Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the
shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guides. Pull the guide upward to expose its storage clip,
and then slide the guide onto the clip. Turn the guide and
clip inward and slide them in between the seatback and
the interior body, leaving only the loop of the elastic cord
exposed.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be seriously
injured. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining
forces.
1-30
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Safety Belt Extender
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the driver
and right front passenger. Although you cannot see
them, they are located on the retractor part of the safety
belts. They help the safety belts reduce a person’s
forward movement in a moderate to severe frontal or
near frontal crash.
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1-68.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer will
order you an extender. It is free. When you go in to order
it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender
will be long enough for you. To help avoid personal injury,
do not let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat
it is made to fit. The extender has been designed for
adults. Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it,
just attach it to the regular safety belt. For more
information, see the instruction sheet that comes with the
extender.
1-31
Child Restraints
Older Children
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips,
just touching the top of the thighs. It should never be
worn over the abdomen, which could cause severe
or even fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-32
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window, move
the child toward the center of the vehicle. Also see
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides on page 1-28.
If the child is sitting in the center rear seat passenger
position, move the child toward the safety belt
buckle. In either case, be sure that the shoulder belt
still is on the child’s shoulder, so that in a crash the
child’s upper body would have the restraint the
belts provide.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can not properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
1-33
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt in
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
1-34
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if
a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck
and the safety belt continues to tighten. Never
leave children unattended in a vehicle and never
allow children to play with the safety belts.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby does not
weigh much — until a crash. During a crash a
baby will become so heavy it is not possible to
hold it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly
become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a person’s
arms. A baby should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
1-35
CAUTION:
(Continued)
children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults and older
CAUTION:
1-36
(Continued)
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint, state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
{CAUTION:
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This is
necessary because a newborn infant’s neck is
weak and its head weighs so much compared
with the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing seat settles into the restraint, so the
crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
shoulders. Infants always should be secured in
appropriate infant restraints.
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children always should be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
1-37
Child Restraint Systems
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.
1-38
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with
the seating surface against the back of the infant.
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Some
booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and some
high-back booster seats have a five-point harness. A
booster seat can also help a child to see out the window.
1-39
Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner. To help reduce
injuries, an add-on child restraint must be secured
in the vehicle. With built-in or add-on child
restraints, the child has to be secured within the
child restraint.
When choosing an add-on child restraint, be sure
the child restraint is designed to be used in a
vehicle. If it is, it will have a label saying that it
meets federal motor vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You
may find these instructions on the restraint itself or
in a booklet, or both.
1-40
Securing an Add-on Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child restraint is not properly
secured in the vehicle. Make sure the child
restraint is properly installed in the vehicle
using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came
with that restraint, and also the instructions in
this manual.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-43 for more information. A child can
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be
on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important, so
if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy from
the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in
the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint
in your vehicle — even when no child is in it.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
There are several systems for securing the child within
the child restraint. One system, the three-point
harness, has straps that come down over each of the
infant’s shoulders and buckle together at the crotch.
The five-point harness system has two shoulder straps,
two hip straps, and a crotch strap. A shield may take
the place of hip straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder
straps that are attached to a flat pad which rests low
against the child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield
has straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like
shield that swings up or to the side.
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child is not properly secured in the
child restraint. Make sure the child is properly
secured, following the instructions that came
with that restraint.
Because there are different systems, it is important to
refer to the instructions that come with the restraint.
A child can be endangered in a crash if the child is not
properly secured in the child restraint.
1-41
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
We recommend that child restraints be secured in a rear
seat, including an infant riding in a rear-facing infant
seat, a child riding in a forward-facing child seat and an
older child riding in a booster seat.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a
rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This
is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if
the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
CAUTION:
1-42
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one
can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will
go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to secure
the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in
the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint
in your vehicle — even when no child is in it.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
Your vehicle has lower anchors and top tether anchors.
Your child restraint may have lower attachments and
a top tether.
Your vehicle has the LATCH system. The LATCH
system holds a child restraint during driving or in a
crash. This system is designed to make installation
of a child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses
anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the
child restraint that are made for use with the LATCH
system
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
Lower Anchors
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the
child restraint. A child restraint must never be installed
using only the top tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,
you need a child restraint equipped with LATCH
attachments. The child restraint manufacturer will
provide you with instructions on how to use the child
restraint and its attachments. The following explains
how to attach a child restraint with these attachments
in your vehicle.
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
1-43
Top Tether Anchor
Some top tether-equipped child restraints are designed
for use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. In the United States, some child restraints
also have a top tether. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for your child restraint.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask
the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with two
lower anchors.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
Rear Seat
1-44
Each rear seating position has two exposed metal lower
anchors in the crease between the seatback and the
seat cushion.
To assist you in locating
the top tether anchors,
the top tether anchor
symbol is located on the
trim cover.
The top tether anchors are located under the trim
covers on the rear seatback filler panel. Pull open the
trim cover to access the anchor. Be sure to use an
anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as the
seating position where the child restraint will be placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in the right front
passenger’s position if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached. There is no place to attach the
top tether in this position.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-42 for
additional information.
1-45
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to anchors, the restraint will not be able to
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child
could be seriously injured or killed. Make sure
that a LATCH-type child restraint is properly
installed using the anchors, or use the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that came with that
restraint, and also the instructions in this
manual.
1-46
{CAUTION:
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor in the
vehicle is designed to hold only one child
restraint. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the
anchor or attachment to come loose or even
break during a crash. A child or others could
be injured if this happens. To help prevent
injury to people and damage to your vehicle,
attach only one child restraint per anchor.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. Pull open the top tether anchor trim cover to
expose the anchor.
2.3. Route, attach, and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
If the position you are
using does not have a
head restraint and you
are using a single tether,
route the tether over
the seatback.
If the position you are
using has a fixed head
restraint and you are using
a single tether, route the
tether over the head
restraint.
If the position you are
using has a fixed or
adjustable head restraint
and you are using a
dual tether, route the tether
around the head restraint.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
If the position you are
using does not have a
head restraint and you
are using a dual tether,
route the tether over
the seatback.
1-47
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-43.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-48
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap
portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. If you are using a forward-facing
child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint as you
tighten the belt.
1-49
6. If your child restraint manufacturer recommends
using a top tether, attach and tighten the top
tether to the top tether anchor. Refer to the
instructions that came with the child restraint and
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-43.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, if the top tether is attached
to the top tether anchor, disconnect it. Unbuckle the
vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.
The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to
work for an adult or larger child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s airbag. A rear
seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing child
restraint. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-42.
In addition, your vehicle may have the passenger sensing
system. The passenger sensing system is designed to
turn off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag when an
infant in a rear-facing infant seat or a small child in a
forward-facing child restraint or booster seat is detected.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-62 and
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-26 for more
information on this including important safety information.
1-50
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one
can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat position, move the seat as far
back as it will go before securing the forward-facing
child restraint. See Manual Seats on page 1-2.
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-43.
There is no top tether anchor at the right front seating
position. Do not secure a child restraint in this position if
a national or local law requires that the top tether be
anchored or if the instructions that come with the child
restraint say that the top tether must be anchored.
See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 1-43 if your child restraint has a top tether.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure
the child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s frontal
airbag. See Passenger Sensing System on
page 1-62. General Motors recommends that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in a rear seat,
even if the airbag is off. If your child restraint is
forward-facing, move the seat as far back as it will
go before securing the child restraint in this
seat. See Manual Seats on page 1-2.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off
indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when you turn the ignition to
RUN or START. See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 3-26.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-51
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
1-52
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap
portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. If you are using a forward-facing
child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint as you
tighten the belt. You should not be able to pull more
of the belt from the retractor once the lock has
been set.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
Airbag System
8. If your vehicle has a passenger sensing system and
the airbag is off, the off indicator on the instrument
panel will be lit and stay lit when the key is
turned to RUN or START.
Your vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driver and a
frontal airbag for the right front passenger. Your vehicle
may also have roof-mounted side impact airbags.
Roof-mounted side impact airbags are available for the
driver and the passenger seated directly behind the driver
and for the right front passenger and the passenger
seated directly behind that passenger.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint.
If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint.
If your vehicle has roof-mounted side impact airbags,
the word AIRBAG will appear on the airbag covering on
the garnish trim near the ceiling and the side windows.
Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the risk
of injury from the force of an inflating frontal airbag.
But these airbags must inflate very quickly to do their
job and comply with federal regulations.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-53
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Airbags are “supplemental
restraints” to the safety belts. All airbags are
designed to work with safety belts but do not
replace them.
CAUTION:
1-54
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Frontal airbags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to deploy in moderate
to severe frontal and near frontal crashes. They
are not designed to inflate in rollover, rear
crashes, or in many side crashes. And, for some
unrestrained occupants, frontal airbags may
provide less protection in frontal crashes than
more forceful airbags have provided in the past.
Roof-mounted side impact airbags are designed
to inflate in moderate to severe crashes where
something hits the side of your vehicle. They
are not designed to inflate in frontal, in rollover
or in rear crashes. Everyone in your vehicle
should wear a safety belt properly — whether or
not there is an airbag for that person.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Both frontal and side impact airbags inflate
with great force, faster than the blink of an
eye. If you are too close to an inflating airbag,
as you would be if you were leaning forward, it
could seriously injure you. Safety belts help
keep you in position for airbag inflation before
and during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt even with frontal airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible while still
maintaining control of the vehicle. Occupants
should not lean on or sleep against the door.
Anyone who is up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer the best protection for adults, but
not for young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
see Older Children on page 1-32 or Infants and
Young Children on page 1-34.
1-55
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag
symbol.
Where Are the Airbags?
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-25
for more information.
The driver’s airbag is in the middle of the steering wheel.
1-56
The right front passenger’s airbag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger’s side.
If your vehicle has a roof-mounted side impact airbag for
the driver and the person seated directly behind the
driver, it is located in the ceiling above the side windows.
1-57
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has a roof-mounted side impact airbag
for the right front passenger and the person directly
behind that passenger, it is located in the ceiling above
the side windows.
1-58
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put
anything between an occupant and an airbag,
and do not attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other
airbag covering. And, if your vehicle has
roof-mounted side impact airbags, never secure
anything to the roof of your vehicle by routing
the rope or tiedown through any door or window
opening. If you do, the path of an inflating side
impact airbag will be blocked. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept clear.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal airbags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate
only if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment
threshold. Deployment thresholds take into account
a variety of desired deployment and non-deployment
events and are used to predict how severe a crash
is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help
restrain the occupants. Whether your frontal airbags
will or should deploy is not based on how fast your
vehicle is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit,
the direction of the impact and how quickly your
vehicle slows down.
In addition, your vehicle has “dual-stage” frontal airbags,
which adjust the restraint according to crash severity.
Your vehicle has an electronic frontal sensor which helps
the sensing system distinguish between a moderate
frontal impact and a more severe frontal impact.
For moderate frontal impacts, these airbags inflate at a
level less than full deployment. For more severe frontal
impacts, full deployment occurs. If the front of your
vehicle goes straight into a wall that does not move or
deform, the threshold level for the reduced deployment
is about 12 to 16 mph (19 to 26 km/h), and the
threshold level for a full deployment is about
18 to 24 mph (29 to 38.5 km/h).
The threshold level can vary, however, with specific
vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat above or
below this range.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole) the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
Frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger) are
not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts.
Your vehicle may or may not have roof-mounted side
impact airbags. See Airbag System on page 1-53.
Roof-mounted side impact airbags are intended to inflate
in moderate to severe side crashes. A roof-mounted side
impact airbag will inflate if the crash severity is above the
system’s designed threshold level.
1-59
The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle design.
Roof-mounted side impact airbags are not intended to
inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts, rollovers or rear
impacts. A roof-mounted side impact airbag is intended to
deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by
what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down. For roof-mounted
side impact airbags, inflation is determined by the
location and severity of the impact.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. The
sensing system triggers a release of gas from the
inflator, which inflates the airbag. The inflator, airbag,
and related hardware are all part of the airbag modules
inside the steering wheel and in the instrument panel
in front of the right front passenger. For vehicles
with roof-mounted side impact airbags, there are also
airbag modules in the ceiling of the vehicle, near
the side windows.
1-60
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. The airbag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. But the frontal
airbags would not help you in many types of collisions,
including rollovers, rear impacts, and many side impacts,
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward the
airbag. Side impact airbags would not help you in many
types of collisions, including many frontal or near frontal
collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts, primarily because
an occupant’s motion is not toward those airbags.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more than
a supplement to safety belts, and then only in moderate
to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions for the driver’s
and right front passenger’s frontal airbags, and only in
moderate to severe side collisions for side impact
airbags.
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates?
After a frontal airbag inflates, it quickly deflates,
so quickly that some people may not even realize the
airbag inflated. Roof-mounted side impact airbags deflate
more slowly and may still be at least partially inflated
minutes after the vehicle comes to rest. Some
components of the airbag module — the steering wheel
hub for the driver’s airbag, the instrument panel for the
right front passenger’s airbag or the garnish trim near the
ceiling and the side windows — may be hot for a short
time. The parts of the airbag that come into contact with
you may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There will be
some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the
driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to
steer the vehicle, nor does it stop people from leaving
the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
When an airbag inflates, there is dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe
to do so. If you have breathing problems but
cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
window or a door. If you experience breathing
problems following an airbag deployment, you
should seek medical attention.
Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically
unlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, turn the
hazard warning flashers on and turn off the climate
control system when the airbags inflate (if battery power
is available). You can lock the doors again, turn the
interior lamps off, turn the hazard warning flashers off
and turn the climate control system on by using the
controls for those features.
1-61
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation. Additional
windshield breakage may also occur from the right front
passenger airbag.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for your
airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in another
crash. A new system will include airbag modules and
possibly other parts. The service manual for your
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
Passenger Sensing System
If your vehicle has one of the indicators pictured in the
following illustrations, then your vehicle has a passenger
sensing system for the right front passenger’s position.
A passenger airbag status indicator on the instrument
panel will be visible when you turn your ignition key to
START or RUN. The words ON and OFF, or the symbol
for ON and OFF, will be visible on the instrument panel
during the system check. When the system check is
complete, either the word ON or the word OFF, or the
symbol for ON or the symbol for OFF will be visible.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-26.
diagnostic module which records information after a
crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders on page 7-9.
• Let only qualified technicians work on your airbag
system. Improper service can mean that your airbag
system will not work properly. See your dealer for
service.
United States
Canada
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver’s airbag and the side airbags (if equipped)
are not part of the passenger sensing system.
1-62
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger’s seat and safety belt.
The sensors are designed to detect the presence of
a properly-seated occupant and determine if the
passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled
(may inflate) or not.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
General Motors recommends that child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a
rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a
rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is
because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the
airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one
can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will
go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
1-63
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
• the right front passenger seat is unoccupied
• the system determines that an infant is present in a
rear-facing infant seat
• the system determines that a small child is present
in a forward-facing child restraint
• the system determines that a small child is present
•
•
•
in a booster seat
a right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time
the right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints
or if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicator on the
instrument panel will light and stay lit to remind you that
the airbag is off.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint
following the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position on page 1-50.
1-64
If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make sure that
the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child restraint
into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly recline the
vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat cushion if
possible. Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens, adjust
the head restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer.
The passenger sensing system is designed to enable
(may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal airbag
anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is
sitting properly in the right front passenger’s seat. When
the passenger sensing system has allowed the airbag to
be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit to remind
you that the airbag is active.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag, depending upon the person’s seating posture and
body build. Everyone in your vehicle who has
outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that
person.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
If this happens, turn the vehicle off and ask the person to
place the seatback in the fully upright position, then sit
upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with the
person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the vehicle
and have the person remain in this position for about two
minutes. This will allow the system to detect that person
and then enable the passenger’s airbag.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it
means that something may be wrong with the
airbag system. If this ever happens, have the
vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the frontal airbag. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 3-25 for more on this, including
important safety information.
1-65
Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers, can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates. You
may want to consider not using seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment if your vehicle has the passenger
sensing system. See Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-67 for more
information about modifications that can affect how
the system operates.
{CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s seat
or between the passenger’s seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the proper
operation of the passenger sensing system.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around your vehicle. You do not want the system to
inflate while someone is working on your vehicle.
Your dealer and the service manual have information
about servicing your vehicle and the airbag system.
To purchase a service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 7-14.
{CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
airbag can still inflate during improper service.
You can be injured if you are close to an
airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
1-66
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add to the front or
sides of the vehicle that could keep the
airbags from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, front end or side sheet
metal or height, they may keep the airbag system
from working properly. Also, the airbag system may
not work properly if you relocate any of the airbag
sensors. If you have any questions about this,
you should contact Customer Assistance before
you modify your vehicle. The phone numbers
and addresses for Customer Assistance are in
Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure
in this manual. See Customer Satisfaction
Procedure on page 7-2
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
A: Changing or moving any parts of the front seats,
safety belts, the airbag sensing and diagnostic
module (located under the center console), or the
instrument panel can affect the operation of the
airbag system. If you have questions, call Customer
Assistance. The phone numbers and addresses for
Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the
Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.
1-67
Restraint System Check
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
Checking the Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and
anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s airbag, or the side
impact airbag covering (if equipped) on the garnish
trim near the ceiling and the side windows, the airbag
may not work properly. You may have to replace the
airbag module in the steering wheel, both the airbag
module and the instrument panel for the right front
passenger’s airbag, or the side impact airbag module
and the garnish trim near the ceiling and the side
windows for roof-mounted side impact airbags
(if equipped). Do not open or break the airbag
coverings.
1-68
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may
not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn
during a more severe crash, then you need new parts.
If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system was not being used at the time of
the collision.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
If the frontal airbags inflate you will also need to replace
the driver and front passenger’s safety belt retractor
assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the new retractor
assembly will be there to help protect you in a collision.
After a crash you may need to replace the driver and
front passenger’s safety belt retractor assemblies, even
if the frontal airbags have not deployed. The driver
and front passenger’s safety belt retractor assemblies
contain the safety belt pretensioners. Have your
safety belt pretensioners checked if your vehicle has
been in a collision, or if your airbag readiness light stays
on after you start your vehicle or while you are driving.
See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-25.
1-69
✍ NOTES
1-70
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys ...............................................................2-2
Remote Keyless Entry System .........................2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2-4
Doors and Locks .............................................2-7
Door Locks ....................................................2-7
Power Door Locks ..........................................2-8
Delayed Locking .............................................2-8
Automatic Door Lock .......................................2-9
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ...............2-9
Rear Door Security Locks ................................2-9
Lockout Protection ........................................2-10
Trunk ..........................................................2-10
Windows ........................................................2-12
Manual Windows ..........................................2-13
Power Windows ............................................2-13
Sun Visors ...................................................2-13
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-14
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-14
PASS-Key® III+ ............................................2-15
PASS-Key® III+ Operation ..............................2-16
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-17
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-17
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-18
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................2-20
Starting the Engine .......................................2-20
Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-22
Automatic Transaxle Operation .......................2-23
Manual Transaxle Operation ...........................2-26
Parking Brake ..............................................2-27
Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic Transaxle) ......2-29
Shifting Out of Park (P)
(Automatic Transaxle) ................................2-30
Parking Your Vehicle (Manual Transaxle) .........2-31
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-31
Engine Exhaust ............................................2-32
Running the Engine While Parked ...................2-32
Mirrors ...........................................................2-33
Manual Rearview Mirror .................................2-33
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar® .............................................2-33
Outside Manual Mirror ...................................2-34
Outside Remote Control Mirror .......................2-34
Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-34
Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-35
OnStar® System .............................................2-35
Storage Areas ................................................2-37
Glove Box ...................................................2-37
Cupholder(s) ................................................2-37
Center Console Storage Area .........................2-37
Driver’s Storage Compartment ........................2-37
Convenience Net ..........................................2-37
Sunroof .........................................................2-38
2-1
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. They
could operate the power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. The
children or others could be badly injured or
even killed. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.
2-2
One key is used for the
ignition, the doors and all
other locks.
If you need a new key, contact your dealer who can
obtain the correct key code. See Roadside Assistance
Program on page 7-6 for more information.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
Remote Keyless Entry System
If the vehicle has the keyless entry system, it operates
on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer removes
the key tag from the key and gives it to the first owner.
Each tag has a code on it that tells your dealer or a
qualified locksmith how to make extra keys. Keep the
tag in a safe place. If you lose your key, you will be able
to have a new one made easily using the tag.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
2-3
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
page 2-4.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
2-4
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
If your vehicle has this feature, the vehicle’s doors can be
locked and unlocked, and the trunk can be unlocked from
about 3 feet (1 m) up to 60 feet (18 m) away with the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
If you notice a decrease in the operating range of the
transmitter, see Remote Keyless Entry System on
page 2-3 for information regarding conditions which
may affect the transmitter’s performance.
The following functions are
available with the remote
keyless entry system.
Q (Lock): Press the lock button to lock all the doors. If
enabled through the Driver Information Center (DIC), the
remote lock feedback can be programmed to have the
horn chirp and/or the parking lamps flash when the
remote keyless entry transmitter is used to lock the
vehicle’s doors. See “LOCK HORN” and “LIGHT FLASH”
under DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-43 for more
information.
Pressing the lock button may arm the content
theft-deterrent system. See Content Theft-Deterrent on
page 2-14.
" (Unlock):
Press the unlock button one time to unlock
the driver’s door. Press the unlock button again within
five seconds to unlock the other doors. The interior
lamps will come on and stay on for 20 seconds or until
the ignition is turned on. If enabled through the DIC,
the remote unlock feedback can be programmed to have
the horn chirp and/or the turn signal lamps flash when
the remote keyless entry transmitter is used to
unlock the vehicle’s doors. See “UNLOCK HORN” and
“LIGHT FLASH” under DIC Vehicle Personalization
on page 3-43 for more information.
If enabled through the DIC, and it is dark enough
outside, the vehicle’s high-beam headlamps and parking
lamps will come on each time the unlock button on
the transmitter is pressed. These exterior lamps will stay
on for 20 seconds, or until a door is opened. See
“EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS” under DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 3-43.
Pressing the unlock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter will disarm the content-theft deterrent
system. See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-14 for
more details.
V (Remote Trunk Release): The trunk will open
when this button on the transmitter is pressed and held
for approximately one second. You can open the
trunk with the transmitter when the vehicle is stationary.
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm):
Press and
release this button to help locate your vehicle. The horn
will sound three times and the hazard lamps will flash
three times. Press and hold the button for three seconds
to sound the panic alarm. The horn will sound and the
hazard lamps will flash for 30 seconds. The ignition must
be off for the vehicle locator/remote alarm to work.
Press the vehicle locator/panic alarm button again or
turn the ignition to ACC (Accessory) or RUN to turn off
the alarm.
2-5
Matching Transmitter(s) to
Your Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is uniquely coded
to prevent another transmitter from unlocking the
vehicle. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement
can be purchased through your GM dealer. Remember
to bring any additional transmitters with you when
you go to your dealer. The vehicle can have a maximum
of four transmitters matched to it.
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in the remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about four years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter will not
work, at the normal range, in any location. If you
have to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter
works, it is probably time to change the battery. The
KEY FOB BATT LOW message in the vehicle’s DIC will
display, if the remote keyless entry transmitter battery
is low.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
To replace the battery do the following:
1. Insert a flat object with a thin edge into the notch,
located below the Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm
button, and pry the front and back apart.
2. Remove the old battery, but do not use a metal
object to do this.
3. Slide the new battery into the transmitter with the
positive side of the battery facing up. Use a type
CR2032 battery, or equivalent type.
4. Snap the front and the back of the transmitter
together.
5. Test the operation of the transmitter with the
vehicle.
2-6
Doors and Locks
CAUTION:
Door Locks
(Continued)
• Young children who get into unlocked
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers — especially children — can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the
handle will not open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle
in a crash if the doors are not locked. So,
wear safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
•
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
To lock the driver’s door from the outside, turn the
key clockwise. To unlock the door, turn the key
counterclockwise.
You can also use the remote keyless entry transmitter,
if equipped, to lock and unlock the doors.
From the inside, use the manual lock knobs on each
door or the power door lock switch to lock and unlock
all doors.
2-7
Power Door Locks
Delayed Locking
Your vehicle may have
power door locks. If so,
they are located on
the driver’s and front
passenger’s door armrest.
Driver’s Switch shown,
Front Passenger’s
Switch similar
Press the side of the switch with the lock symbol to lock
the doors. This is the right side for the driver’s switch
and the left side for the front passenger’s switch.
Press the side of the switch with the unlock symbol to
unlock the doors. This is the left side for the driver’s
switch and the right side for the front passenger’s switch.
2-8
If your vehicle has power locks, it will have the delayed
locking feature.
This feature will delay the actual locking of the doors for
up to five seconds when the power door lock switch
or remote keyless entry transmitter is used to lock the
vehicle.
If any door is open when locking the vehicle, three
chimes will sound signaling that the delayed locking
feature is active. Five seconds after the last door
is closed, all of the doors will lock and the turn signal
lamps will flash. To cancel the delay and lock the doors
immediately, press the lock button a second time.
This feature will not lock the doors if the key is in the
ignition.
You can disable this function through the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 3-43.
Automatic Door Lock
Rear Door Security Locks
If your vehicle has power door locks, the doors will
automatically lock when the shift lever is moved out of
PARK (P) for a vehicle with an automatic transmission.
For a vehicle with a manual transmission, the speed
must be greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Your vehicle has rear door security locks. These
prevent passengers from opening the rear doors from
the inside.
The rear door security
locks are located on the
inside edge of each
rear door. You must open
the rear doors to access
them. The label depicting
lock and unlock positions
is located near the lock.
The automatic door locking feature cannot be disabled.
Programmable Automatic
Door Unlock
If your vehicle has power locks, it has a programmable
automatic door unlock feature.
The doors can be programmed through the Driver
Information Center (DIC) to automatically unlock several
ways. See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-43
for more information.
Security Lock Label
shown
To set the locks, do the following:
1. Insert the key into the security lock slot and
turn it so the slot is in the horizontal position.
2. Close the door.
2-9
When you want to open a rear door when the security
lock is on, do the following:
1. Unlock the door using the remote keyless entry
transmitter, if the vehicle has one, the power door
lock switch, or by lifting the rear door manual lock.
2. Open the door from the outside.
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
so the slot is in the vertical position.
Lockout Protection
If your vehicle has power door locks, it will have this
feature. If you press the power door lock switch
when the key is in the ignition and any door is open, all
the doors will lock and the driver’s door will unlock.
Be sure to remove the key from the ignition when locking
your vehicle.
The lockout protection can be overridden by pressing
and holding the power door lock in the lock position for
three seconds.
Trunk
To release the trunk lid from the outside, use the key or
the remote keyless entry transmitter, if equipped.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You cannot see or
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death. If you must drive with the trunk lid
open or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the trunk lid:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See Climate Control
System.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See Engine Exhaust on page 2-32.
2-10
Remote Trunk Release
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
To open the trunk from
inside the vehicle, press
the remote trunk release
button located inside
the driver’s storage
compartment located on
the lower left side of
the instrument panel.
See Instrument Panel Overview on page 3-4 or Driver’s
Storage Compartment on page 2-37.
The remote trunk release works when the ignition is
either off or in ACC, or the vehicle speed is less
than 2 mph (3 km/h).
Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk release
handle as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the trunk as it could damage the handle.
The emergency trunk release handle is only
intended to aid a person trapped in a latched trunk,
enabling them to open the trunk from the inside.
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release
handle located on the inside of the trunk lid of your
vehicle. This handle will glow following exposure to light.
Pull the release handle and push the trunk lid open
from the inside to open the trunk.
2-11
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
2-12
Manual Windows
Express-Down Window
If your vehicle has manual windows, use the window
crank to open and close each window.
The driver’s window switch has an express-down
feature which allows the window to be lowered fully
without continuously pressing the switch. This switch is
labeled AUTO. Press the front of the switch to the
first position, and the driver’s window will open a small
amount. Press the switch down fully and the window
will go all the way down.
Power Windows
To stop the window while it is lowering, pull the front of
the switch up.
Window Lockout
o (Window Lockout):
Sedan Shown, Coupe
Similar
If your vehicle has power windows, the switches on the
driver’s door armrest control each of the windows.
In addition, each passenger’s door has a window switch
that controls that door’s window. Press the front of
the switch to open the window. Pull the front of
the switch up to close it.
The driver’s window controls
also include a lockout switch. Press the right side of the
switch to prevent the rear passengers from using
their window switches. The driver can still control all the
windows with the lockout on. Press the switch to the
left to return to normal window operation. A red bar on
the right side of the switch indicates that the lockout
feature is off.
Sun Visors
To block out glare, swing down the visor(s). The visors
can also be detached from the center mount and
swung to the side to cover the windows.
2-13
Visor Vanity Mirror
Arming the System
Your vehicle may have a driver’s side vanity mirror.
Swing down the sun visor and lift the cover to expose
the mirror.
With the ignition off, you can arm the system by doing
any one of the following:
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle may have a
content theft-deterrent
alarm system.
• Press the remote keyless entry transmitter lock
button.
• Press the power door lock switch while the driver’s
door is open.
The system will arm after either of these things occur:
• Thirty seconds after all the doors are closed.
• Sixty seconds with any door open.
If you press the lock button on the transmitter a second
time while all the doors are closed, the system will
arm immediately. The system will still arm in 60 seconds
if a door is open. When the open door is closed, it will
also become armed.
The security light, located on the instrument panel
cluster, will turn on to indicate that arming has been
initiated. Once the system is armed, the security light will
flash once every three seconds.
If the security light is flashing twice per second, this
means that a door is open.
If you do not want to arm the system, you may lock the
car with the manual lock knobs on the doors.
2-14
Disarming the System
How to Turn Off the System Alarm
You can disarm the system by doing any one of the
following:
To turn off the system alarm, do one of the following:
• Press the remote keyless entry transmitter unlock
button.
• Turn the ignition on.
If the system is armed and the trunk is opened using
the trunk release button on the transmitter, the system
will temporarily disarm itself and re-arm when the
trunk has been closed. This allows you to exit the
vehicle, lock the doors using the transmitter, and open
the trunk using the transmitter without having to
disarm and re-arm the system.
Once the system is disarmed, the security light will stop
flashing.
How the System Alarm is Activated
If the system is armed, it can be activated by either:
• Opening the driver’s door or trunk. This will
cause a ten second pre-alarm chirp followed by a
thirty second full alarm of horn and lights.
• Opening any other door. This will immediately
cause a full alarm of horn and lights for
thirty seconds.
When an alarm event has finished, the system will
re-arm itself automatically.
• Press the lock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter. The system will then re-arm itself.
• Press the unlock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter. This will also disarm the system.
• Insert the key in the ignition and turn it on. This will
also disarm the system.
How to Detect a Tamper Condition
If you hear three chirps when you press the unlock, lock,
or trunk release buttons on the remote keyless
transmitter, it means that the content theft security
system alarm was previously activated.
PASS-Key® III+
The PASS-Key® III+ system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
2-15
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
PASS-Key® III+ uses a radio frequency transponder in
the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle.
PASS-Key® III+ Operation
®
Your vehicle is equipped with PASS-Key III+
(Personalized Automotive Security System)
theft-deterrent system. PASS-Key® III+ is a passive
theft-deterrent system. This means you do not have to
do anything special to arm or disarm the system. It
works when you insert or remove the key from
the ignition.
When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that someone
is using the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle from
starting. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start
the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high
number of electrical key codes.
2-16
When trying to start the vehicle if the engine does not
start and the security light on the instrument panel
cluster comes on, the key may have a damaged
transponder. Turn the ignition off and try again.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to be
not damaged, try another ignition key. At this time, you
may also want to check the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 5-98. If the engine still does not start
with the other key, your vehicle needs service. If your
vehicle does start, the first key may be faulty. See your
dealer who can service the PASS-Key® III+ to have a
new key made. In an emergency, contact Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 7-6.
It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to “learn”
the transponder value of a new or replacement key.
Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle. The
following procedure is for programming additional keys
only. If all the currently programmed keys are lost or do
not operate, you must see your dealer or a locksmith who
can service PASS-Key® III+ to have keys made and
programmed to the system.
See your dealer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut
exactly as the ignition key that operates the system.
To program the new key do the following:
1. Verify that the new key has a
1 stamped on it.
2. Insert the already programmed key in the ignition
and start the engine. If the engine will not start, see
your dealer for service.
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to OFF,
and remove the key.
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to the
RUN position within five seconds of the original key
being turned to the OFF position.
5. The security light will turn off once the key has
been programmed.
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 if additional keys are to
be programmed.
If you are ever driving and the security light comes on
and stays on, you may be able to restart your engine if
you turn it off. Your PASS-Key® III+ system, however,
is not working properly and must be serviced by
your dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by the
PASS-Key® III+ system at this time.
If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key, see
your dealer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
Starting and Operating
Your Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts. Do not exceed
5,000 engine rpm. Avoid downshifting to brake,
or slow, the vehicle.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time your new
brake linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops
with new linings can mean premature wear
and earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake
linings.
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing
a Trailer (Automatic Transaxle) on page 4-39 or
Towing a Trailer (Manual Transaxle) on
page 4-46 for the trailer towing capabilities of
your vehicle and more information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
2-17
Ignition Positions
With the key in the ignition switch, you can turn it to
four different positions.
9 (LOCK):
This position locks your steering column.
It is a theft-deterrent feature. You will only be able
to remove your key when the ignition is turned to LOCK.
If you have an automatic transaxle, the ignition switch
cannot be turned to LOCK unless the shift lever is
in PARK (P).
If you have a manual transaxle, the ignition switch can
be turned to LOCK in any shift lever position.
{CAUTION:
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break the
key. Use the correct key and turn the key only with
your hand. Make sure the key is all the way in. If
it is, turn the steering wheel left and right while you
turn the key hard. If none of this works, then
your vehicle needs service.
2-18
If you have a manual transaxle removing the key
from the ignition switch will lock the steering
column and result in a loss of ability to steer the
vehicle. This could cause a collision. If you need
to turn the engine off while the vehicle is
moving, turn the key to ACC.
ACC (ACCESSORY): This position operates some of
your electrical accessories. It unlocks the steering wheel
and ignition.
R (RUN): This is the position the switch returns to after
you start your engine and release the switch. The
switch stays in the RUN position when the engine is
running. But even when the ignition is not running, you
can use RUN to operate your electrical accessories
and to display some warning and indicator lights.
Column Lock Release
The following procedure allows the ignition to be turned
to LOCK and for ignition key removal in case of a
dead battery or low voltage battery.
1. Make sure the shift lever is in PARK (P).
/ (START): This position starts the engine. When the
engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch
will return to RUN for normal driving.
A warning tone will sound if you open the driver’s door
while in LOCK or ACC, when the key has not been
removed from the ignition.
2. Using a tool, pry off the cover from the bottom of
the steering column.
2-19
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Your vehicle has a Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
feature which allow’s the radio, power windows,
and sunroof to continue to work up to 10 minutes after
the ignition is turned off.
Your vehicle’s radio will work when the ignition key is in
RUN or ACC. Once the key is turned from RUN to
LOCK, the radio will continue to work for 10 minutes or
until the driver’s door is opened. Also, the power
windows and sunroof will continue to work for up to
10 minutes or until any door is opened.
Starting the Engine
3. Place your finger into the access hole and locate
the plunger.
4. Press and hold the plunger toward the driver’s
door while turning the ignition key to LOCK.
Remove the key.
Have your vehicle serviced at your GM dealer as soon
as possible.
2-20
Automatic Transaxle
Move the shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
The engine will not start in any other position — that is
a safety feature. To restart when you are already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehicle
moving could damage the transaxle. Shift into
PARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped.
Manual Transaxle
The shift lever should be in NEUTRAL and the parking
brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal to the floor
and start the engine. Your vehicle will not start if the
clutch pedal is not all the way down — that is a safety
feature.
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition to START. When the engine starts, let go
of the key. The idle speed will go down as your
engine gets warm.
Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the
engine and protects the electrical system. If the
ignition key is turned to the START position,
and then released when the engine begins cranking,
the engine will continue cranking until the vehicle
starts or until it exceeds the maximum cranking time
allowed, approximately 15 seconds to prevent
cranking motor damage. To prevent gear damage,
this system also prevents cranking if the engine
is already running. The engine cranking can
be stopped by turning the ignition switch to the
ACCESSORY or LOCK position.
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer
than 15 seconds at a time will cause your
battery to be drained much sooner.
And the excessive heat can damage your starter
motor. Wait about 15 seconds between each try to
help avoid draining your battery or damaging
your starter.
2. If it does not start, wait about 15 seconds and try
again to start the engine by turning the ignition to
START. Wait about 15 seconds between each try.
When the engine has run about 10 seconds to
warm up, your vehicle is ready to be driven. Do not
run your engine at high speed when it is cold.
If the weather is below freezing (32°F or 0°C), let
the engine run for a few minutes to warm up.
3. If the engine still will not start, or starts but then
stops, it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds. If the vehicle starts
briefly but then stops again, do the same thing, but
this time keep the pedal down for five or six seconds.
This clears the extra gasoline from the engine.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly. Any resulting damage
would not be covered by your vehicle’s warranty.
2-21
Engine Coolant Heater
Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine coolant
heater.
In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine
coolant heater can help. You will get easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.
Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a
minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle.
At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant
heater is not required. Your vehicle may also have
an internal thermostat in the plug end of the cord. This
will prevent operation of the engine coolant heater
when the temperature is at or above 0°F (−18°C) as
noted on the cord.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. For
the 2.2L and 2.4L engines, the electrical cord is
located on the passenger’s side of the vehicle
between the strut and the air cleaner/filter.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
2-22
{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be
damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
a GM dealer in the area where you will be parking
your vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice
for that particular area.
Automatic Transaxle Operation
If your vehicle is equipped with an automatic transaxle,
the shift lever is located on the console between
the seats.
There are several different
positions for the automatic
transaxle.
PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels. It is
the best position to use when you start your engine
because your vehicle cannot move easily.
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P). See Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic
Transaxle) on page 2-29. If you are pulling a
trailer, see Towing a Trailer (Automatic
Transaxle) on page 4-39 or Towing a Trailer
(Manual Transaxle) on page 4-46.
Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before
starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic
transaxle shift lock control system. You have to
fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift
from PARK (P) when the ignition key is in RUN.
2-23
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure
on the shift lever — push the shift lever all the way into
PARK (P) and also release the shift lever button as you
maintain brake application. Then move the shift lever into
the gear you wish. Press the shift lever button before
moving the shift lever. See Shifting Out of Park (P)
(Automatic Transaxle) on page 2-30.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transaxle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transaxle, see If
Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on
page 4-30.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
while the engine is running at high speed may
damage the transaxle. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speeds when shifting your vehicle.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
Notice: Shifting to a drive gear from NEUTRAL (N)
while the vehicle is moving could damage the
transaxle. Make sure the vehicle is stopped before
shifting from NEUTRAL (N) into a drive gear.
2-24
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): This position is for
normal driving with the automatic transaxle. If you need
more power for passing, and you are:
• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator all the way down.
INTERMEDIATE (I): This position is also used for
normal driving. However, it offers braking from
the engine for slight downgrades where the vehicle
would otherwise accelerate due to steepness of grade.
If repetitive shifts occur between third and fourth
gears on steep uphills, this position can be used to
prevent repetitive shifting. Fuel economy will be lower
than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D). Here are some
times you might choose INTERMEDIATE (I) instead of
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D):
LOW (L): This position gives you even more power but
lower fuel economy than INTERMEDIATE (I). You
can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud.
If the shift lever is put in LOW (L), the transaxle will
not shift into LOW (L) until the vehicle is going slowly
enough.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transaxle. If you are stuck,
do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes, or parking brake to hold the vehicle
in place.
• When driving on hilly, winding roads.
• When towing a trailer, so there is less shifting
between gears.
2-25
Manual Transaxle Operation
This is your shift pattern.
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5): Shift into
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5) the same way
you do for SECOND (2). Slowly let up on the clutch
pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the
brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press
the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to
NEUTRAL.
NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start or idle
your engine.
REVERSE (R): To back up, press down the clutch
pedal and shift into REVERSE (R). Let up on the clutch
pedal slowly while pressing the accelerator pedal.
Here is how to operate your manual transaxle:
FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into
FIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as
you press the accelerator pedal.
You can shift into FIRST (1) when you are going less
than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you have come to a complete
stop and it is hard to shift into FIRST (1), put the shift
lever in NEUTRAL and let up on the clutch. Press
the clutch pedal back down. Then shift into FIRST (1).
SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let up
on the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND (2).
Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal.
2-26
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transaxle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
Also, use REVERSE (R), along with the parking brake,
for parking your vehicle.
For vehicles with the 2.0L Supercharged engine, press
down the clutch pedal. Then, lift up the ring on the shift
lever below the shift knob and shift into REVERSE (R).
Let up on the clutch pedal slowly while pressing the
accelerator pedal.
Shift Speeds
When this light comes on, you can shift to the next
higher gear if weather, road, and traffic conditions let
you. For the best fuel economy, accelerate slowly
and shift when the light comes on.
{CAUTION:
If you skip a gear when you downshift, you
could lose control of your vehicle. You could
injure yourself or others. Do not shift down
more than one gear at a time when you
downshift.
While you accelerate, it is normal for the light to go on
and off if you quickly change the position of the
accelerator. Ignore the light when you downshift.
Parking Brake
Up-Shift Light
If you have a manual
transaxle, you may have
an up-shift light. This
light will show you when
to shift to the next
higher gear for the best
fuel economy.
United States Only
Manual Transaxle Parking Brake Lever
2-27
To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down
and pull up on the parking brake lever. If the ignition is
on, the brake system warning light will come on.
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-29.
To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal
down. Pull the parking brake lever up until you can press
the release button. Hold the release button in as you
move the brake lever all the way down.
If you forget to release your parking brake, a chime will
sound and a warning light will flash when the parking
brake is applied and the vehicle is moving faster
than 5 mph (8 km/h). See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-40.
Automatic Transaxle Parking Brake Lever
The parking brake lever is located between the
front seats.
For vehicles equipped with an armrest, lift the console
armrest in order to access the parking brake lever.
2-28
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
Shifting Into Park (P)
(Automatic Transaxle)
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, use the steps that follow. If you are
pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer
(Automatic Transaxle) on page 4-39 or Towing
a Trailer (Manual Transaxle) on page 4-46.
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the parking
brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by holding the
button on the shift lever and pushing the lever all
the way toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
have moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the
regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move
the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pushing
the button. If you can, it means that the shift lever
was not fully locked into PARK (P).
2-29
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in
the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the shift
lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then
shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into Park (P)
(Automatic Transaxle) on page 2-29.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle, then
you will be able to pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
Shifting Out of Park (P)
(Automatic Transaxle)
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock
release system. The shift lock release is designed to:
• Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift
lever is in PARK (P) with the shift lever button fully
released, and
• Prevent movement of the shift lever out of PARK (P)
unless the ignition is in a position other than LOCK.
The shift lock release is always functional except in the
case of a an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt)
battery.
If your vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery
with low voltage, try charging or jump starting the
battery. See Jump Starting on page 5-42 for more
information.
To shift out of PARK (P) use the following sequence:
1. Apply the brake pedal.
2. Then press the shift lever button.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
2-30
If you still are unable to shift out of PARK (P):
Parking Over Things That Burn
1. Fully release the shift lever button.
2. While holding down the brake pedal, press the shift
lever button again.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you still cannot move the shift lever from PARK (P),
consult your dealer or a professional towing service.
Parking Your Vehicle
(Manual Transaxle)
Before leaving your vehicle, fully press the clutch pedal
in, move the shift lever into REVERSE (R), and firmly
apply the parking brake. Once the shift lever has
been placed in REVERSE (R) with the clutch pedal
pressed in, you can turn the ignition key to LOCK,
remove the key and release the clutch. See Manual
Transaxle Operation on page 2-26.
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other
things that can burn.
2-31
Engine Exhaust
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see
or smell. It can cause unconsciousness and
death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system has been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-32
Running the Engine While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
Engine Exhaust on page 2-32.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
See Winter Driving on page 4-26.
Mirrors
{CAUTION:
Manual Rearview Mirror
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P).
To reduce glare from lamps behind you, move the lever
toward you to the night position.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar®
If the vehicle has this feature, an automatic dimming
mirror automatically dims to the proper level to minimize
glare at night from lights behind your vehicle. For more
information about OnStar®, see OnStar® System on
page 2-35.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic Transaxle)
on page 2-29.
P(On/Off):
If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling a
trailer, also see Towing a Trailer (Automatic Transaxle)
on page 4-39 or Towing a Trailer (Manual Transaxle)
on page 4-46.
The automatic dimming mirror function is turned on each
time the ignition is started. A light near the on/off button
will come on to indicate the automatic dimming is on.
This is the on/off button.
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
Press the on/off button for about four seconds to
manually turn the automatic dimming function on or off.
2-33
Cleaning the Mirror
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
Outside Power Mirrors
The controls for the
outside power mirrors are
located on the driver’s
door armrest.
Outside Manual Mirror
Adjust your outside mirror so you can just see the side of
your vehicle and have a clear view of objects behind you.
The mirror can be folded in to enter narrow areas.
Outside Remote Control Mirror
Adjust the driver’s outside mirror with the control lever
located on the driver’s door. Adjust the outside mirrors so
that the side of the vehicle can be seen while sitting in a
comfortable driving position.
To adjust the passenger’s outside mirror, sit in the
driver’s seat and have a passenger adjust the mirror
for you. The mirror is a manual fold design.
Move the selector switch located below the four-way
control pad to the left or right to choose either the driver’s
side or passenger’s side mirror. To adjust a mirror, use
the arrows located on the four-way control pad to move
the mirror in the desired direction. The mirror will only
move right or left, up or down. Adjust each outside mirror
so that a little of the vehicle and the area behind it can be
seen while sitting in a comfortable driving position. Keep
the selector switch in the center position when not
adjusting either outside mirror.
Both mirrors can manually be folded by pulling them
toward the vehicle. This feature may be useful
when going through a car wash or a confined space.
Push the mirrors away from the vehicle, to the normal
position, before driving.
2-34
Outside Convex Mirror
OnStar® System
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from the
driver’s seat. It also makes things appear farther
away than they really are.
OnStar® uses several innovative technologies and live
advisors to provide you with a wide range of safety,
security, information, and convenience services. If your
airbags deploy, the system is designed to make an
automatic call to OnStar® Emergency where we can
request emergency services be sent to your location.
If you lock your keys in the car, call OnStar® at
1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal to unlock
your doors. If you need roadside assistance, press the
OnStar® button and they can contact Roadside Service
for you.
A complete OnStar® Owner’s Guide and the Terms
and Conditions of the OnStar® Subscription Service
Agreement are included in the vehicle’s OnStar®
Subscriber Information packet located in your vehicle.
For more information, visit www.onstar.com or
www.onstar.ca, contact OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827), or press the OnStar® button to
speak with an OnStar® advisor 24 hours a day,
7 days a week.
2-35
OnStar® Services
For new vehicles equipped with OnStar®, the Safe &
Sound Plan is included for one year from the date
of purchase. You can extend this plan beyond the first
year, or upgrade to the Directions & Connections Plan to
meet your needs. For more information, press the
OnStar® button to speak with an advisor.
Safe & Sound Plan
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification
OnStar® Hands-Free Calling
AccidentAssist
OnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows OnStar® subscribers
to make and receive calls using voice commands at
the touch of a button. Hands-Free Calling is fully
integrated into the vehicle, and may be used with
Pre-Paid Packages or linked to a cell phone through
OnStar® Shared Minutes Plan. To find out more, refer to
the OnStar® Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove
box, visit www.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speak
with an OnStar® advisor by pressing the OnStar® button
or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
OnStar® Virtual Advisor
(If Equipped)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Directions & Connections® Plan
• All Safe & Sound Plan Services
• Driving Directions
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
Emergency Services
Roadside Assistance
Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
®
OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics
OnStar® Hands-Free Calling
OnStar® Virtual Advisor
2-36
Your vehicle may have Virtual Advisor. It is a feature of
OnStar® Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes
to access weather, local traffic reports, and stock quotes.
By pressing the phone button and giving a few simple
voice commands, you can browse through the
various topics. Customize your information profile at
www.myonstar.com. See the OnStar® Owner’s Guide for
more information.
Storage Areas
Glove Box
Open the glove box by lifting up on the lever. Close the
glove box with a firm push.
Cupholder(s)
There are two cupholders located at the front of the
center console, in front of the shift lever. There are also
cupholders for the rear seat passengers located at
the rear of the center console.
Center Console Storage Area
Your vehicle may have a center console armrest with
storage area. Use the lever on the front of the console
to open it.
Driver’s Storage Compartment
The driver’s storage compartment is located near the
left side of the steering column on the bottom of the
instrument panel. Pull cover down to open. It can be
used to store small items and contains the remote trunk
release switch. For more information, see Remote Trunk
Release under Trunk on page 2-10.
Convenience Net
Your vehicle may have a convenience net. You will see
it inside the back wall of the trunk. Put small loads
behind the net. It can help keep them from falling over
during sharp turns or quick starts and stops.
Unclip a corner of the convenience net to fit larger
objects behind the net, then reclip it to secure them in
place. The net is not for larger, heavier loads. Store
them in the trunk as far forward as you can.
You can unhook the net so that it will lie flat when you
are not using it.
2-37
Sunroof
Your vehicle may be
equipped with a power
sunroof. The switch
that operates it is located
on the headliner.
Press and hold the switch rearward to open the glass
panel to the vent position. Press and hold the switch
rearward a second time to open the sunroof. If the
sunshade is closed, it will open automatically with the
sunroof.
To close the sunroof, press the switch forward and hold
it until the sunroof is closed. The sunroof will stop if
the switch is released. The sunshade must be closed
manually.
The sunroof glass panel cannot be opened or closed if
the vehicle has an electrical failure.
To open or close the sunroof, the ignition must be on,
or turned to ACC, or Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) must be active. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 2-20.
2-38
Notice: If you force the sunshade forward of the
sliding glass panel, damage will occur and the
sunroof may not open or close properly. Always
close the glass panel before closing the sunshade.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6
Other Warning Devices ...................................3-6
Horn .............................................................3-6
Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-7
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-8
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-8
Flash-to-Pass .................................................3-8
Windshield Wipers ..........................................3-9
Windshield Washer .......................................3-10
Cruise Control ..............................................3-10
Headlamps ..................................................3-13
Wiper Activated Headlamps ............................3-14
Headlamps on Reminder ................................3-14
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................3-14
Fog Lamps ..................................................3-15
Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-15
Dome Lamp .................................................3-15
Entry/Exit Lighting .........................................3-16
Mirror Reading Lamps ...................................3-16
Battery Run-Down Protection ..........................3-16
Accessory Power Outlet(s) .............................3-16
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ......................3-17
Climate Controls ............................................3-17
Climate Control System .................................3-17
Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-20
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ...................3-20
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-22
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-23
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-24
Tachometer .................................................3-24
Safety Belt Reminder Light .............................3-24
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light .............3-25
Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-25
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ...................3-26
Charging System Light ..................................3-28
Up-Shift Light ...............................................3-29
Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-29
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-30
Enhanced Traction System Warning Light .........3-31
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light ......3-32
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-32
Oil Pressure Light .........................................3-35
Security Light ...............................................3-36
Fog Lamp Light ............................................3-36
Highbeam On Light .......................................3-36
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-36
Boost Gage .................................................3-37
3-1
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-38
DIC Operation and Displays ...........................3-38
DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-40
DIC Vehicle Personalization ............................3-43
Audio System(s) .............................................3-48
Setting the Time ...........................................3-49
Radio with CD (Uplevel) ................................3-50
Radio with CD (MP3) ....................................3-57
3-2
Theft-Deterrent Feature ..................................3-70
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .......................3-71
Radio Reception ...........................................3-71
Care of Your CDs .........................................3-72
Care of the CD Player ...................................3-72
Fixed Mast Antenna ......................................3-73
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .............3-73
✍ NOTES
3-3
Instrument Panel Overview
3-4
The main components of your instrument panel are the
following:
A. Side Window Outlets. See Climate Control System
on page 3-17.
B. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-20.
C. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.
D. Cruise Control Buttons (If Equipped). See Cruise
Control on page 3-10.
E. Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped).
See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-71.
F. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel
Cluster on page 3-23.
G. Hazard Warning Flashers Button. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 3-6.
H. Windshield Wiper/Washer Controls. See Windshield
Wipers on page 3-9 and Windshield Washer on
page 3-10.
I. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-48.
J. Fog Lamp Button (If Equipped). See Fog Lamps
on page 3-15.
K. Trunk Release. See Trunk on page 2-10.
L. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. See Instrument
Panel Brightness on page 3-15.
M. Horn. See Horn on page 3-6.
N. Driver Information Control Button. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on page 3-38.
O. Cigarette Lighter (If Equipped). Accessory Power
Outlet (If Equipped). See Ashtray(s) and Cigarette
Lighter on page 3-17 and Accessory Power Outlet(s)
on page 3-16.
P. Shift Lever (Manual Shown). See Manual Transaxle
Operation on page 2-26 and Automatic Transaxle
Operation on page 2-23.
Q. Climate Controls. See Climate Control System on
page 3-17.
R. Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator and Heated
Seats Button (If Equipped). See Passenger Airbag
Status Indicator on page 3-26 and Heated Seats
on page 1-4.
S. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-37.
3-5
Hazard Warning Flashers
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
The hazard warning
flasher button is located
in the center of the
instrument panel.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to turn the
flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals will not work.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
Horn
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key is not in
the ignition switch.
3-6
To sound the horn, press the center pad on the steering
wheel.
Tilt Wheel
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel
before you drive. You can raise the steering wheel to
the highest level to give your legs more room when you
enter and exit the vehicle.
The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheel is
located on the left side of the steering column.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
• G Turn and Lane-Change Signals. See Turn and
Lane-Change Signals on page 3-8.
• 23 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on
page 3-8.
To tilt the wheel, pull down the lever. Then move the
wheel to a comfortable position, pull up the lever to lock
the wheel in place.
• Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass on page 3-8.
• O Exterior Lamp Control. See Headlamps
on page 3-13.
3-7
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and
two downward (for left) positions. These positions
allow you to signal a turn or a lane change.
To change the headlamps from low beam to high
beam, push the turn signal lever away from you.
When the high beams
are on, this light on the
instrument panel cluster
will also be on.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or
down. When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
To change the headlamps from high beam to low beam,
pull the turn signal lever toward you.
Flash-to-Pass
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by
itself when you release it.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows
flash rapidly, a signal bulb may be burned out and other
drivers will not see your turn signal. If a bulb is burned
out, replace it to help avoid an accident.
If the arrows do not go on at all when you signal a turn,
check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 5-98.
3-8
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
To use it, pull the turn signal/multifunction lever toward
you until the high-beam headlamps come on, then
release the lever to turn them off.
Windshield Wipers
x
(Delay): When the lever is in the intermittent
position, turn the intermittent adjust band with this
symbol on it up or down to set for a shorter or longer
delay between wipes. To the left of the adjust band
are bars, increasing in size from bottom to top,
that indicate the frequency of the wipes. Smaller
bars mean the wipers movement is less frequent.
Larger bars mean the movement is more frequent.
6 (Low Speed): Move the lever up to the
first setting past intermittent, for steady wiping at low
speed.
Use this lever, located on the right side of the steering
wheel, to operate the windshield wipers.
9 (Off): Move the lever to this position to turn off the
windshield wipers.
& (Intermittent):
Move the lever to this position to
choose a delayed wiping cycle. Rotate the intermittent
adjustment band to set for shorter or longer delay
cycles. To the left of the adjustment band are bars,
increasing in size from top to bottom. Smaller bars mean
the wiper movement is less frequent and larger bars
mean the wiper movement is more frequent.
During intermittent wiping mode, the cycle delay time is
also affected by vehicle speed. As your vehicle speed
increases, your delay cycle time will automatically
decrease.
1 (High Speed): Move the lever up to the second
setting past intermittent, for wiping at high speed.
8 (Mist):
Move the lever all the way down to this
position for a single wiping cycle. Hold it there until the
windshield wipers start; then let go. The windshield
wipers will stop after one wiping cycle. If you want
additional wiping cycles, hold the lever down longer.
Damaged wiper blades may prevent you from seeing well
enough to drive safely. To avoid damage, be sure to clear
ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them.
If the wiper blades are frozen to the windshield, carefully
loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become
damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
3-9
Heavy snow or ice can overload your wiper motor.
A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools. Clear
away snow or ice to prevent an overload. If the motor
gets stuck, turn the wipers off, clear away the snow or ice,
and then turn the wipers back on.
As an added safety feature, if the wipers are on for
more than 15 seconds, the vehicle’s headlamps will turn
on automatically. They will turn off 15 seconds after
the wipers are turned off.
Cruise Control
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
25 mph (40 km/h).
{CAUTION:
Windshield Washer
To wash your windshield, press the button at the end of
the lever until the washers begin.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
When you release the button, the washers will stop, but
the wipers will continue to wipe for about three times
or will resume the speed you were using before.
3-10
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
Setting Cruise Control
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
J (On/Off): Press this button to turn the cruise control
system on and off.
+RES (Resume): Press this part of the button to
resume a set speed and to accelerate the speed.
−SET (Set): Press this part of the button to set a speed
and to decrease the speed.
To set a speed do the following:
1. Press the on/off button to turn cruise control on.
The indicator light on the button will come on.
2. Get to the speed you want.
3. Press the −SET part of the control button and
release it. The CRUISE ENGAGED message
will appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC)
to show the system is engaged.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If the vehicle is in cruise control and the Traction
Control System (TCS) begins to limit wheel spin, the
cruise control will automatically disengage. See
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) on page 4-9. When
road conditions allow, the cruise control can be
used again.
The cruise control buttons are located on the
steering wheel.
3-11
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired
speed and then you apply the brake. This, of course,
disengages the cruise control. To return to your
previously set speed, you do not need to go through
the set process again. Once you’re going about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more, you can press the +RES
part of the button briefly.
This will take you back up to your previously chosen
speed and stay there.
Increasing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed.
1. Disengage the cruise control by applying the brake
pedal but do not turn it off. Accelerate to a higher
speed and reset the cruise control.
2. If the cruise control system is already engaged, press
the +RES part of the button. Hold it there until you
get up to the speed you want, and then release the
button. To increase your speed in very small
amounts, press the +RES part of the button briefly
and then release it. Each time you do this, your
vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
3-12
Reducing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
If the cruise control system is already engaged,
• Push and hold the −SET part of the button until you
reach the lower speed you want, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, push
the −SET part of the button briefly. Each time you
do this, you’ll go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you may have to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going
downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to
keep your speed down. Of course, applying the brake
takes you out of cruise control. Many drivers find this to
be too much trouble and don’t use cruise control on
steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
The exterior lamp switch has the following four positions:
To end cruise control, step lightly on the brake pedal or
the clutch if your vehicle has a manual transmission.
Stepping on the brake pedal or clutch will only end the
current cruise control session. Press the cruise control
on/off button to turn the system completely off.
2 (Headlamps):
Erasing Speed Memory
AUTO (Automatic Headlamp System): This position
automatically turns on the Daytime Running Lamps
during daytime, and the headlamps, parking lamps, and
taillamps at night. This position must be selected in order
for the Wiper Activated Headlamps to be activated. See
Wiper Activated Headlamps on page 3-14.
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your
cruise control set speed memory is erased.
Headlamps
This position turns on the
headlamps, parking lamps, and taillamps.
; (Parking Lamps):
This position turns on the
parking lamps and taillamps only.
P (Off/On): This position is the momentary Off/On
switch for the Automatic Headlamp System. In Canada,
this only works when a vehicle with an automatic
transaxle is in PARK (P).
When operating in AUTO, a momentary turn of the
switch to off/on will turn off the Automatic Headlamp
System. Rotating the switch to off/on again will turn the
Automatic Headlamp System back on. The Automatic
Headlamp System is always turned on at the beginning
of an ignition cycle.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
operates the exterior lamps.
3-13
Wiper Activated Headlamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
This feature activates the headlamps and parking lamps
after the windshield wipers are turned on. For this feature
to work, automatic lighting must be enabled. See
Headlamps on page 3-13 for additional information.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions,
but they can be especially helpful in the short periods
after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional daytime
running lamps are required on all vehicles first sold in
Canada. The vehicle has a light sensor on top of the
instrument panel. Make sure it is not covered, or the
head lamps will be on when not needed.
When the ignition is turned off, the wiper-activated
headlamps will immediately turn off. They will also turn
off 15 seconds after the windshield wiper control is
turned off.
Headlamps on Reminder
If you open the driver’s door with the ignition off and the
lamps on, you will hear a warning chime.
The DRL system will make your front turn signal lamps
come on when the following conditions are met:
• The ignition is on.
• The exterior lamps control is in AUTO or the
parking lamps only position.
• The light sensor detects daytime light.
• The parking brake is released.
When the DRL system is on, the taillamps, sidemarker
lamps, parking lamps, and instrument panel lights
will not be illuminated unless you have turned the
exterior lamps control to the parking lamp position.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
3-14
Fog Lamps
Instrument Panel Brightness
If equipped, the fog lamp
button is located on the
instrument panel, to the left
of the steering wheel.
The control for this feature
is located on the instrument
panel to the left of the
steering wheel.
The ignition must be on to turn your fog lamps on.
Push the button to turn the fog lamps on. An indicator
light on the cluster will come on when the fog lamps are
on. Push the button again to turn the fog lamps off.
The parking lamps will automatically turn on and off when
the fog lamps are turned on and off.
The fog lamps will turn off while the high-beam
headlamps are turned on.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
Turn the knob clockwise to brighten the lights or
counterclockwise to dim them.
Dome Lamp
Your vehicle may have a dome lamp.
9 (Off): Move the lever to this position to turn the
lamp off, even when a door is opened.
1
(Door): Move the lever to this position to turn the
lamp on whenever a door is opened.
+ (On): Move the lever to this position to turn the
dome lamp on.
3-15
Entry/Exit Lighting
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
The lamps inside your vehicle will go on when you
open any door. These lamps will fade out after about
20 seconds after all of the doors have been closed or
when the ignition is turned on. These lamps will also go
on when you press the trunk release, unlock symbol
button or the horn symbol on the keyless entry system
transmitter.
Accessory power outlets can be used to connect
electrical equipment such as a cellular phone or CB
radio. The outlet can accept electrical equipment rated
at a maximum of 20 amps.
The lamps inside your vehicle will stay on for about
20 seconds after your key is removed from the ignition
to provide an illuminated exit.
Mirror Reading Lamps
Your vehicle may have reading lamps on the rearview
mirror. Push the button to turn the reading lamps on
and off.
Battery Run-Down Protection
Your vehicle is equipped with a battery saver feature
designed to protect your vehicle’s battery.
When any interior lamp is left on and the ignition is
turned off, the battery rundown protection system will
automatically turn the lamp off after 20 minutes. This will
avoid draining the battery.
3-16
The accessory power outlet is located in the center
console, rearward of the shift lever.
To use the outlet, remove the cover. When not in use,
always cover the outlet with the protective cap.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always turn
off electrical equipment when not in use and do
not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum
amperage rating.
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible with
the accessory power outlet and could result in blown
vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a problem,
see your dealer for additional information on the
accessory power outlet.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage rating. Check with
your dealer before adding electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
installation instructions included with the equipment.
Climate Controls
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not hang
any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the
plug because the power outlets are designed for
accessory power plugs only.
Climate Control System
With this system you can control the heating, cooling,
and ventilation for your vehicle.
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
Your vehicle may have an ashtray and cigarette lighter.
To use the lighter, located on the instrument panel
below the climate controls, push it in all the way and let
go. When it is ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold
a cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
To clean the center console ashtray, remove the entire
ashtray and empty it.
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other flammable
items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking
materials could ignite them and possibly damage
your vehicle. Never put flammable items in the
ashtray.
Vehicles with Air Conditioning shown,
without Air Conditioning similar
Operation
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
H (Vent):
This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
) (Bi-Level):
This mode directs approximately half of
the air to the instrument panel outlets, and then directs
the remaining air to the floor outlets. Cooler air is directed
to the upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.
3-17
6 (Floor):
This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets with some air directed to the windshield and
side windows.
The left knob can also be used to select defog or
defrost mode. Information on defogging and defrosting
can be found later in this section.
Recirculation is not available in this mode.
9 (Fan):
Turn the center knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed.
In any setting other than off, the fan will run continuously
with the ignition on. The fan must be turned on to run
the air conditioning compressor.
9 (Off): To turn the fan off, turn the knob all the way
counterclockwise to the off position.
Temperature Control: Turn the right knob clockwise
or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
temperature inside your vehicle.
3-18
h (Recirculate):
Press this button to prevent outside
air and odors from entering your vehicle or to help heat or
cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly. An indicator
light above the button will come on in this mode. The air
conditioning compressor also comes on. This mode is not
available for floor, defog and defrost modes. When the
recirculation button is pressed, the recirculate indicator
light will flash five times and outside air will be delivered.
Operation in this mode during periods of high humidity
and cool outside temperatures may result in increased
window fogging. If window fogging is experienced, select
the defrost mode.
Outside Air: This mode allows outside air to circulate
through your vehicle. This mode is automatically
active if recirculate is not selected. There is no button
for outside air.
# (Air Conditioning):
If your vehicle has air
conditioning, press this button to turn the air conditioning
system on or off. When this button is pressed, an
indicator light above the button will come on to let
you know the air conditioning is activated.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helps
the system to operate more efficiently.
For quick cool down on hot days:
1. Select the vent mode.
2. Select the recirculation mode.
3. Select air conditioning.
4. Select the coolest temperature.
5. Select the highest fan speed.
Using these settings together for long periods of time
may cause the air inside of your vehicle to become too
dry. To prevent this from happening, after the air in
your vehicle has cooled, turn off the recirculation
by pressing the button again.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of
water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling
or after turning off the engine. This is normal.
The air conditioning compressor cannot be turned on
when the fan is off.
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. This
can be minimized if the climate control system is used
properly. There are two modes to clear fog or frost from
your windshield and side windows. Use the defog mode
to clear the windows of fog or moisture and warm the
passengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fog or frost
from the windshield more quickly. For best results, clear
all snow and ice from the windshield before defrosting.
Turn the left knob to select the defog or defrost mode.
- (Defog):
This mode directs approximately half of the
air to the windshield and the side window outlets and
half to the floor outlets. When you select this mode
the system runs the air conditioning compressor.
To defog the windows faster, turn the temperature
control knob clockwise to the warmest setting.
Recirculation mode is not available in defog mode.
0 (Defrost):
This mode directs most of the air to the
windshield, with some air directed to the side window
outlets and the floor outlets. When you select this mode
the system runs the air conditioning compressor. To
defrost the windows faster, turn the temperature control
knob clockwise to the warmest setting.
Recirculation mode is not available in defrost mode.
3-19
Rear Window Defogger
Outlet Adjustment
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
Use the thumbwheels located next to and below the air
outlets to change the direction of the airflow and to
open and close the outlets.
The rear window defogger will only work when the
ignition is in RUN.
< (Rear):
Press the button to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. Be sure to clear as much snow from
the rear window as possible. An indicator light above
the button will come on to let you know that the
rear window defogger is activated.
The rear window defogger will turn off approximately
15 minutes after the button is pressed. If turned
on again, the defogger will only run for approximately
seven minutes before turning off. If the vehicle is moving
faster than 50 mph (80 kph), the rear defogger will stay
on. The defogger can also be turned off by pressing the
button again or by turning off the engine.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside of
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage
the warming grid, and the repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Do not attach a temporary
vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything similar to
the defogger grid.
3-20
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into your vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more
effectively.
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Passenger compartment air, both outside air and
recirculated air, is routed through a passenger
compartment filter. The filter removes certain particles
from the air, including pollen and dust particles.
Reductions in airflow, which may occur more quickly
in dusty areas, indicate that the filter needs to be
replaced early.
The filter should be replaced as part of routine
scheduled maintenance. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4 for replacement intervals. See your
retailer for details on changing the filter. To find out
what type of filter to use, see Normal Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 6-14.
To access the passenger compartment air filter you
must go through the glove box.
1. Open the glove box and remove all articles from
the inside.
3. Open the passenger compartment air filter door by
reaching through the opening in the back of the
glove box and raising the tab until the door can be
opened downward.
2. Tilt the glove box door down by squeezing on each
side of the glove box until the door can be lowered
from its track. Lower the glove box door.
3-21
Warning Lights, Gages,
and Indicators
4. Remove the filter by sliding it out of the housing.
When installing a new air filter make sure the AIR FLOW
arrow is pointing downward. Reverse Steps 1 through
5 making sure the glove box door snaps back into place.
3-22
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something
is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will
see in the details on the next few pages, some warning
lights come on briefly when you start the engine just to let
you know they’re working. If you are familiar with this
section, you should not be alarmed when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to let you know when there’s
a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on as
you are driving, or when one of the gages shows there
may be a problem, check the section that tells you what
to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice. Waiting
to do repairs can be costly — and even dangerous. So
please get to know your warning lights and gages.
They’re a big help.
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will know
how fast you are going, about how much fuel is left in the tank, and many other things you will need to drive safely
and economically.
United States SS Cluster shown, Canada and Base similar
3-23
Speedometer and Odometer
Safety Belt Reminder Light
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will
sound for several seconds to remind you and your
passengers to buckle your safety belts. The driver safety
belt light will also come on and stay on for several
seconds, then it will flash for several more. You should
buckle your seat belt.
Your vehicle’s odometer works together with the
driver information center. You can set a Trip A and
Trip B odometer. See “Trip Information” under DIC
Operation and Displays on page 3-38.
The odometer mileage can be checked without the
vehicle running. Simply open the driver’s door and the
mileage will be displayed briefly.
If your vehicle ever needs a new odometer installed, the
new one will be set to the correct mileage total of the
old odometer.
Tachometer
The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
Notice: If you operate the engine with the
tachometer in the shaded warning area, your vehicle
could be damaged, and the damages would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not operate
the engine with the tachometer in the shaded
warning area.
3-24
This chime and light will
be repeated if the driver
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
If the driver’s belt is buckled, neither the chime nor the
light will come on.
Passenger Safety Belt
Reminder Light
If equipped, several seconds after the key is turned to
RUN or START, a chime will sound for several seconds
to remind the front passenger to buckle their safety
belt. This would only occur if the passenger airbag is
enabled. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-62
for more information. The passenger safety belt light
will also come on and stay on for several seconds, then
it will flash for several more.
This chime and light will be
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
Airbag Readiness Light
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the airbag symbol. The system
checks the airbag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. The
system check includes the airbag sensor, the airbag
modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic
module. For more information on the airbag system, see
Airbag System on page 1-53.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash for
a few seconds. Then the
light should go out. This
means the system is ready.
If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light will come on.
3-25
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start
the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,
your airbag system may not work properly. Have your
vehicle serviced right away.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
If your vehicle has the passenger sensing system, then
your instrument panel has a passenger airbag status
indicator. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-62.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle
serviced right away if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light does not come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
3-26
United States
Canada
When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START, the
passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and
OFF, or the symbol for on and off, for several seconds
as a system check. Then, after several more seconds,
the status indicator will light either ON or OFF, or either
the on or off symbol to let you know the status of the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).
{CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you have a
rear-facing child restraint installed in the right
front passenger’s seat, it means that the
passenger sensing system has not turned off
the passenger’s frontal airbag. A child in a
rear-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger’s
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close
to the inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front passenger’s
seat if the airbag is turned on.
{CAUTION:
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is failsafe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. We recommend that rear-facing
child restraints be secured in the rear seat,
even if the airbag is off.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-62
for more on this, including important safety information.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a
rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This
is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
3-27
If, after several seconds, all status indicator lights remain
on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a problem
with the lights or the passenger sensing system. See your
dealer for service.
{CAUTION:
If the off indicator and the airbag readiness
light ever come on together, it means that
something may be wrong with the airbag
system. If this ever happens, have the vehicle
serviced promptly, because an adult-size
person sitting in the right front passenger seat
may not have the protection of the frontal
airbag. See Airbag Readiness Light on
page 3-25.
3-28
Charging System Light
The charging system light
will come on briefly when
you turn on the ignition,
and the engine is not
running, as a check
to show you it is working.
Then it should go out when the engine is started.
If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving, you
may have a problem with the electrical charging system.
Have it checked by your GM dealer. Driving while this
light is on could drain your battery.
If you must drive a short distance with the light on, be
certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
Up-Shift Light
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle may have an up-shift light. When this light
comes on, you should shift to the next higher gear if
weather, road, and traffic conditions allow you to.
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though,
you need both parts working well.
This light is located in your
instrument panel cluster to
the left of the tachometer.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have your brake system inspected right away.
United States Only
See Manual Transaxle Operation on page 2-26 for more
information.
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to RUN. If it does not come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
3-29
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will also come on when you set your parking brake. The
light will stay on if your parking brake does not release
fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is fully
released, it means you have a brake problem.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. Make sure the parking brake is
fully released. You may notice that the pedal is harder
to push or, the pedal may go closer to the floor. It
may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the
vehicle towed for service. See Towing Your Vehicle
on page 4-36.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake system warning light is on. Driving
with the brake system warning light on can lead
to an accident. If the light is still on after you
have pulled off the road and stopped carefully,
have the vehicle towed for service.
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning
Light
If your vehicle is equipped
with the anti-lock brake
system, the light will come
on when your engine is
started and may stay on
for several seconds.
That is normal.
If the light stays on, turn the ignition off, if the light comes
on when you are driving, stop as soon as possible and
turn the ignition off. Then start the engine again to reset
the system. If the light still stays on, or comes on again
while you are driving, your vehicle needs service. If the
regular brake system warning light is not on, you still have
brakes, but you do not have anti-lock brakes. If the
regular brake system warning light is also on, you do not
have anti-lock brakes and there is a problem with your
regular brakes. See Brake System Warning Light on
page 3-29.
The anti-lock brake system warning light will come on
briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. This
is normal. If the light does not come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
3-30
Enhanced Traction System
Warning Light
If your vehicle is equipped
with the Enhanced
Traction System (ETS),
this warning light should
come on briefly as
you start the engine.
If the warning light does not come on, then have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If the warning light stays on, or comes on when you are
driving, there may be a problem with your Enhanced
Traction System and your vehicle may need service.
When this warning light is on, the system will not limit
wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
The Enhanced Traction System warning light may come
on for the following reasons:
• If you turn the system off by moving the shift lever
to FIRST (1), the warning light will come on and
stay on. To turn the system back on, move the shift
lever back to a position other than FIRST (1).
The warning light should go off. See Enhanced
Traction System (ETS) on page 4-9 for more
information.
• The warning light will come on when you set your
parking brake with the engine running, and it will
stay on if your parking brake does not release fully.
If the transaxle shift lever is in any position other
than FIRST (1) and the warning light stays on after
your parking brake is fully released, it means
there is a problem with the system.
• If the traction control system is affected by an
engine-related problem, the system will turn off
and the warning light will come on.
If the Enhanced Traction System warning light comes
on and stays on for an extended period of time when the
transaxle shift lever is in any position other than
FIRST (1), your vehicle needs service.
3-31
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
The engine coolant
temperature warning light
will come on when the
engine has overheated.
If this happens you should pull over and turn off the
engine as soon as possible. See Engine Overheating
on page 5-29 for more information.
Notice: Driving with the engine coolant temperature
warning light on could cause your vehicle to
overheat. See Engine Overheating on page 5-29.
Your vehicle could be damaged, and it might not be
covered by your warranty. Never drive with the
engine coolant temperature warning light on.
This light will also come on when starting your vehicle.
If it doesn’t, have your vehicle serviced.
3-32
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
Your vehicle has a
computer which monitors
operation of the fuel,
ignition, and emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life
of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment.
The check engine light comes on to indicate that there is
a problem and service is required. Malfunctions often
will be indicated by the system before any problem is
apparent. This may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle. This system is also designed to assist
your service technician in correctly diagnosing any
malfunction.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with
this light on, after awhile, your emission controls
may not work as well, your fuel economy may not be
as good, and your engine may not run as smoothly.
This could lead to costly repairs that may not be
covered by your warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of your
vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with
other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This may
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
and Modifications on page 5-3.
If the Light is Flashing
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is
not running. If the light does not come on, have it
repaired. This light will also come on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see
“If the Light Is On Steady” following.
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and
may damage the emission control system on your
vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be required.
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Reducing vehicle speed
Avoiding hard accelerations
Avoiding steep uphill grades
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the
engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the Light Is
On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing, follow the
previous steps, and see your dealer for service as soon
as possible.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service may be required.
3-33
If the Light Is On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 5-8. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality will
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.
3-34
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has
the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems that may have
developed.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced your battery or if your battery
has run down. The diagnostic system is designed to
evaluate critical emission control systems during normal
driving. This may take several days of routine driving. If
you have done this and your vehicle still does not pass
the inspection for lack of OBD system readiness, your
GM dealer can prepare the vehicle for inspection.
The oil light could also come on in three other situations:
• When the ignition is on but the engine is not
running, the light will come on as a test to show
you it is working, but the light will go out when you
turn the ignition to START. If it does not come
on with the ignition on, you may have a problem
with the fuse or bulb. Have it fixed right away.
• If you are idling at a stop sign, the light may blink
on and then off.
• If you make a hard stop, the light may come on for
a moment. This is normal.
Oil Pressure Light
If you have a low engine oil
pressure problem, this light
will stay on after you start
your engine, or come on
when you are driving. This
indicates that your engine
is not receiving enough oil.
The engine could be low on oil, or could have some
other oil problem. Have it fixed immediately.
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
If you do, your engine can become so hot that
it catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always follow the maintenance
schedule in this manual for changing engine oil.
3-35
Security Light
Highbeam On Light
For information
regarding this light, see
Theft-Deterrent Systems
on page 2-14.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8.
Fog Lamp Light
If equipped, the fog lamps
light will come on when the
fog lamps are in use.
The light will go out when the fog lamps are turned off.
See Fog Lamps on page 3-15 for more information.
3-36
This light will come on
when the high-beam
headlamps are in use.
Fuel Gage
Your fuel gage tells you
about how much fuel you
have left.
Here are four things that some owners ask about.
None of these show a problem with your fuel gage:
Boost Gage
• At the service station, the gas pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took
a little more or less than half the tank’s capacity
to fill the tank.
• The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or
speed up.
• The gage doesn’t go back to empty when you turn
off the ignition.
For your fuel tank capacity, see Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-107.
United States
Canada
If equipped, this gage is located near the driver’s side of
the instrument panel cluster.
This gage indicates vacuum during light to moderate
throttle and boost under heavier throttle.
This gage displays the air pressure level in the intake
manifold before it enters the engine’s combustion
chamber.
This gage is automatically centered at zero every time
the ignition is turned to RUN. Actual vacuum or boost
is displayed from this zero point. Changes in ambient
pressure, such as driving in mountains and changing
weather, will slightly change the zero reading.
3-37
Driver Information Center (DIC)
DIC Operation and Displays
The Driver Information Center (DIC) display gives you the
status of many of your vehicle’s systems. The DIC is also
used to display driver personalization menu modes and
warning/status messages. All messages will appear in
the DIC display, located at the bottom of the tachometer
on the instrument panel cluster.
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. The DIC has
different modes which can be accessed by pressing the
DIC buttons. The button functions are detailed in the
following.
The DIC buttons are
located to the right of the
steering wheel on the
instrument panel.
4 (Information):
Press this button to scroll through the
vehicle information mode displays.
r (Reset): Press this button to reset some vehicle
information mode displays, select a personalization
menu mode setting, or acknowledge a warning
message.
Press and hold the information and reset buttons at the
same time for one second, then release to enter the
personalization menu. See DIC Vehicle Personalization
on page 3-43 for more information.
3-38
Information Modes
4 (Information):
Press this button to scroll through the
following vehicle information modes:
Outside Air Temperature and Odometer
Press the information button until the outside air
temperature and the odometer are displayed. This mode
shows the temperature outside of the vehicle in either
degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C) and the
total distance the vehicle has been driven in either miles
(mi) or kilometers (km). The outside air temperature will
appear on the left side of the DIC display and the
odometer will appear on the right side of the display.
To change the DIC display to English or metric units,
see “UNITS” under DIC Vehicle Personalization on
page 3-43.
TRIP A or TRIP B
ECON (Economy)
Press the information button until TRIP A or TRIP B is
displayed. These modes show the current distance
traveled since the last reset for each trip odometer in
either miles (mi) or kilometers (km). Both odometers can
be used at the same time.
Press the information button until ECON is displayed.
This mode shows how many miles per gallon (mpg)
or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) your vehicle is
getting based on current and past driving conditions.
Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separately by
pressing and holding the reset button for a few seconds
while the desired trip odometer is displayed.
FUEL RANGE
Press the information button until FUEL RANGE is
displayed. This mode shows the remaining distance
you can drive without refueling in either miles (mi)
or kilometers (km). It is based on fuel economy and the
fuel remaining in the tank.
The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range is an
average of recent driving conditions. As your driving
conditions change, this data is gradually updated. The
FUEL RANGE mode cannot be reset.
Press and hold the reset button while ECON is displayed
to reset the average fuel economy. Average fuel
economy will then be calculated starting from that point.
If the average fuel economy is not reset, it will be
continually updated each time you drive.
AV (Average) SPEED
Press the information button until AV SPEED is
displayed. This mode shows the vehicle’s average speed
in miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).
Press and hold the reset button while AV SPEED is
displayed to reset the average vehicle speed.
3-39
OIL LIFE
DIC Warnings and Messages
Press the information button until OIL LIFE is displayed.
The engine oil life system shows an estimate of the
oil’s remaining useful life. It will show 100% when the
system is reset after an oil change. It will alert you
to change your oil on a schedule consistent with your
driving conditions.
These messages will appear if there is a problem
detected in one of your vehicle’s systems.
In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the
oil life, additional maintenance is recommended in
the Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Engine
Oil on page 5-15 and Scheduled Maintenance on
page 6-4.
Always reset the engine oil life system after an oil
change. See “How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System”
under Engine Oil Life System on page 5-20 and
“OIL–LIFE RESET” under DIC Vehicle Personalization
on page 3-43.
COOLANT
Press the information button until COOLANT is
displayed. This mode shows the temperature of the
engine coolant in either degrees Fahrenheit (°F)
or degrees Celsius (°C).
3-40
Any message will clear when the vehicle’s condition is
no longer present. The warning message will come back
on the next time the vehicle is turned off and back on
if the condition is still present. With most messages,
a warning chime will sound when the message is
displayed. You can also acknowledge and clear some
warning messages from the DIC display by pressing
either the reset or information buttons. Your vehicle may
have other warning messages.
AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS OFF
This message is displayed if the automatic headlamp
system is disabled with the headlamp switch.
AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS ON
This message is displayed if the automatic headlamp
system is enabled with the headlamp switch.
BRAKE FLUID
This message will display if the ignition is on to inform
the driver that the brake fluid level is low. Have the
brake system serviced by your GM dealer as soon as
possible.
CHANGE OIL SOON
ENGINE DISABLED
This message is displayed when the life of the engine
oil has expired and it should be changed.
This message is displayed if the starting of the engine is
disabled. Have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer
immediately.
When you acknowledge the CHANGE OIL SOON
message by clearing it from the display, you still must
reset the engine oil life system separately. See
“OIL-LIFE RESET” under DIC Vehicle Personalization
on page 3-43, Engine Oil Life System on page 5-20,
and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 for more
information.
CHECK GAS CAP
This message is displayed if the gas cap has not been
fully tightened. You should recheck your gas cap to
ensure that it is on properly. A few driving trips with
the cap properly installed should turn the display off.
CRUISE ENGAGED
ENG (Engine) PWR (Power) REDUCED
This message informs you that the vehicle has reduced
engine power to avoid damaging the engine. Reduced
engine power can affect the vehicle’s ability to accelerate.
If this message is on, but there is no reduction in
performance, proceed to your destination. The
performance may be reduced the next time the vehicle is
driven. The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed
while this message is on, but acceleration and speed may
be reduced. Anytime this message stays on, the vehicle
should be taken to your GM dealer for service as soon as
possible.
ICE POSSIBLE
This message is displayed when the cruise control
system is active. See Cruise Control on page 3-10
for more information.
This message appears when the outside air temperature
is cold enough to create icy road conditions.
DOOR AJAR
KEY FOB BATT (Battery) LOW
This message is displayed if one or more of the
vehicle’s doors are not closed properly. When this
message appears, you should make sure that the
door is closed completely.
This message is displayed if the remote keyless entry
transmitter battery is low. See “Battery Replacement”
under Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
page 2-4.
3-41
LOW COOLANT
PARKING BRAKE
If your vehicle has a 2.0L engine, this message is
displayed when there is a low level of engine coolant.
Have the cooling system serviced by your GM dealer as
soon as possible. See Engine Coolant on page 5-24
for more information.
This message is displayed if the parking brake is left
engaged. See Parking Brake on page 2-27.
LOW FUEL
This message is displayed when your vehicle is low on
fuel. You should refill the fuel tank as soon as possible.
See Fuel Gage on page 3-36,Filling the Tank on
page 5-8, and Fuel on page 5-5 for more information.
LOW TRACTION
This message is displayed when the Enhanced Traction
System (ETS) is actively limiting wheel spin. Slippery
road conditions may exist if this message is displayed,
so adjust your driving accordingly. See Enhanced
Traction System (ETS) on page 4-9 for more
information.
3-42
POWER STEERING
This message is displayed if a problem has been
detected with the electric power steering. Have your
vehicle serviced by your GM dealer immediately.
SERVICE AIR BAG
This message is displayed when there is a problem
with the airbag system. Let only a qualified technician
work on your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced
by your GM dealer immediately.
TRUNK AJAR
This message is displayed when the trunk lid of your
vehicle is not closed completely. You should make sure
that the trunk lid is closed completely. See Trunk on
page 2-10.
DIC Vehicle Personalization
Your vehicle has personalization capabilities that allow
you to program certain features to a preferred setting.
All of the features listed may not be available on
your vehicle. Only the features available will be
displayed on your DIC.
The default settings for the features were set when your
vehicle left the factory, but may have been changed
from their default state since then.
To change feature settings, use the following procedure:
Entering Personalization Menu
1. Turn the ignition on while the vehicle is stopped.
2. Press and hold the information and reset buttons at
the same time for one second, then release to enter
the personalization menu.
If the vehicle speed is greater than 2 mph (3 km/h),
only the UNITS menu will be accessible.
3. Press the information button to scroll through the
available personalization menu modes.
Press the reset button to scroll through the available
settings for each mode.
If you do not make a selection within ten seconds,
the display will go back to the previous information
displayed.
Personalization Menu Modes
UNITS
This feature allows you to select the units of
measurement in which the DIC will display the vehicle
information. When UNITS appears on the display, press
and hold the reset button for at least one second to
scroll through the available settings:
ENGLISH (default in United States): All information
will be displayed in English units. For example, distance
will be shown in miles (mi) and fuel economy in miles
per gallon (mpg).
METRIC (default in Canada): All information will be
displayed in metric units. For example, distance will be
shown in kilometers (km) and fuel economy in liters
per 100 kilometers (L/100 km).
Choose one of the available settings and press the
information button to select it and move on to the next
feature.
OIL-LIFE RESET
When this feature is displayed, you can reset the engine
oil life system. To reset the system, see Engine Oil
Life System on page 5-20. See “OIL LIFE” under DIC
Operation and Displays on page 3-38 for more
information.
3-43
LOCK HORN
UNLOCK HORN
If your vehicle has remote keyless entry, this feature,
which allows the vehicle’s horn to chirp every time
the lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter
is pressed, can be enabled or disabled. When LOCK
HORN appears on the display, press and hold the reset
button for at least one second to scroll through the
available settings:
If your vehicle has remote keyless entry, this feature,
which allows the vehicle’s horn to chirp on the first press
of the unlock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter, can be enabled or disabled. When UNLOCK
HORN appears on the display, press and hold the reset
button for at least one second to scroll through the
available settings:
OFF (default): The horn will not chirp on the first press
of the remote keyless entry transmitter lock button.
The horn will still chirp on the second press.
OFF (default): The horn will not chirp when the unlock
button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed.
ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of the remote
keyless entry transmitter lock button.
See Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
page 2-4 for more information.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
information button to select it and move on to the
next feature.
3-44
ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of the unlock
button on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
See Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
page 2-4 for more information.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
information button to select it and move on to the
next feature.
LIGHT FLASH
DELAY LOCK
If your vehicle has remote keyless entry, this feature,
which allows the vehicle’s exterior hazard/turn signal
lighting to flash every time the lock or unlock button on
the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed, can
be enabled or disabled. When LIGHT FLASH appears
on the display, press and hold the reset button for
at least one second to scroll through the available
settings:
This feature, which delays the actual locking of the
vehicle, can be enabled or disabled. When DELAY
LOCK appears on the display, press and hold the reset
button for at least one second to scroll through the
available settings:
OFF: The exterior hazard/turn signal lighting will not
flash when the lock or unlock button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter is pressed.
ON (default): The exterior hazard/turn signal lighting
will flash when the lock or unlock button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter is pressed.
ON (default): The doors will not lock until five seconds
after the last door is closed. You can temporarily
override delayed locking by pressing the power lock
switch or the lock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter a second time.
OFF: The doors will lock immediately when pressing
the power lock switch or the lock button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter.
See Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
page 2-4 for more information.
See Power Door Locks on page 2-8, Delayed Locking
on page 2-8, and Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation on page 2-4 for more information.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
information button to select it and move on to the
next feature.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
information button to select it and move on to the
next feature.
3-45
AUTO UNLK (Unlock)
UNLK (Unlock) (Automatic Transaxle Only)
This feature, which allows the vehicle to automatically
unlock certain doors, can be enabled or disabled. When
AUTO UNLK appears on the display, press and hold
the reset button for at least one second to scroll through
the available settings:
This screen displays only if your vehicle has an
automatic transaxle and DRIVER or ALL is selected
for the AUTO UNLK feature. This feature determines
when the automatic door unlocking will occur. When
UNLK appears on the display, press and hold the reset
button for at least one second to scroll through the
available settings:
ALL (default): All of the doors will automatically unlock.
DRIVER: The driver’s door will automatically unlock.
NONE: None of the doors will automatically unlock. You
will need to manually unlock the doors.
If you have a manual transaxle vehicle, the door(s) will
automatically unlock when the ignition is turned off.
If you have an automatic transaxle vehicle, you
can select when the automatic unlocking will occur. See
“UNLK (Unlock) (Automatic Transaxle Only)” following.
See Programmable Automatic Door Unlock on page 2-9
for more information.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
information button to select it and move on to the
next feature.
3-46
KEY OFF: The door(s) will unlock when the ignition is
turned off.
SHIFT TO P (Park) (default): The door(s) will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
See Programmable Automatic Door Unlock on page 2-9
for more information.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
information button to select it and move on to the next
feature.
EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS
LANGUAGE
If your vehicle has remote keyless entry, this feature,
which allows the vehicle’s exterior perimeter lighting to
turn on each time the unlock button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter is pressed, can be enabled or
disabled. When EXT LIGHTS appears on the display,
press and hold the reset button for at least one second
to scroll through the available settings:
This feature allows you to select the language in which
the DIC will display. Press and hold the reset button
for at least one second to scroll through the available
settings:
OFF: The exterior perimeter lighting will not turn on
when the unlock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter is pressed.
FRENCH: The DIC will display all information in
French.
ON (default): The exterior perimeter lighting will turn
on when the unlock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter is pressed.
See Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
page 2-4 for more information.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
information button to select it and move on to the next
feature.
ENGLISH (default): The DIC will display all information
in English.
SPANISH: The DIC will display all information in
Spanish.
GERMAN: The DIC will display all information in
German.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
information button to select it and exit out of the
personalization menu mode.
Exiting Personalization Menu
The personalization menu will be exited when any of the
following conditions occur:
• A ten second time period has elapsed.
• The ignition is turned off.
• The end of the personalization menu list is reached.
3-47
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then read
the pages following to familiarize yourself with its
features.
Driving without distraction is a necessity for a safer
driving experience. See Defensive Driving on page 4-2.
By taking a few moments to read this manual and get
familiar with your vehicle’s audio system, you can use it
with less effort, as well as take advantage of its features.
While your vehicle is parked, set up your audio system by
presetting your favorite radio stations, setting the tone,
and adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite stations
using the presets and steering wheel controls if the
vehicle has them.
3-48
{CAUTION:
This system provides you with a far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
tasks while driving can cause a crash and you
or others can be injured or killed. Always keep
your eyes on the road and your mind on the
drive — avoid engaging in extended searching
while driving.
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for safe
driving. For more information, see Defensive Driving on
page 4-2.
Here are some ways in which you can help avoid
distraction while driving.
While your vehicle is parked:
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
• Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering wheel
controls if the vehicle has them.
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to your
vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player, CB
radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make sure
that it can be added by checking with your dealer.
Also, check federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone units. If sound equipment can be added,
it is very important to do it properly. Added sound
equipment may interfere with the operation of your
vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems, and even
damage them. Your vehicle’s systems may interfere
with the operation of sound equipment that has been
added.
Notice: The chime signals related to safety belts,
parking brake, and other functions of your vehicle
operate through the radio/entertainment system.
If that equipment is replaced or additional equipment
is added to your vehicle, the chimes may not work.
Make sure that replacement or additional equipment
is compatible with your vehicle before installing it.
See Accessories and Modifications on page 5-3.
Setting the Time
To set the hour, press the clock button. The clock
symbol will appear on the display and the hour number
will flash. Then turn the ADJ knob to increase or to
decrease. To set the minutes, press the clock button
again. The minute numbers will flash. Then turn the
ADJ knob to increase or to decrease. The time can be
set with the ignition on or off.
To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting
Radio Data System (RDS) information, press and hold
the clock button to enter the clock set mode, then press
and hold the clock button for three seconds until
UPDATED appears on the display. If the time is not
available from the station, NO UPDATE will appear on
the display.
RDS time is broadcast once a minute. After tuning to an
RDS broadcast station, it may take a few minutes for
the time to update.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be played
even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-20 for more
information.
3-49
Radio with CD (Uplevel)
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters will appear on the display. RDS
stations may also provide the time of day, a program
type (PTY) for current programming, and the name
of the program being broadcast.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
3-50
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and in Canada (if available).
XM™ offers over 100 coast-to-coast channels including
music, news, sports, talk, and children’s programming.
XM™ provides digital quality audio and text information
that includes song title and artist name. A service fee is
required in order to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Playing the Radio
O (Power):
Press this knob to turn the system on
and off.
u (Volume):
the volume.
Turn this knob to increase or to decrease
AUTO u (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, the audio system adjusts automatically to
make up for road and wind noise as you drive.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AUTO VOL LOW, AUTO
VOL MEDIUM, or AUTO VOL HIGH will appear on the
display. Each higher setting will allow for more volume
compensation at faster vehicle speeds. Then as you
drive, automatic volume increases the volume, as
necessary, to overcome noise at any speed. The volume
level should always sound the same to you as you drive.
AUTO VOL NONE will appear on the display if the radio
cannot determine the vehicle speed or if the engine is not
running. To turn automatic volume off, press this button
until AUTO VOL OFF appears on the display.
DISP (Display): When the ignition is off, press this
knob to display the time.
For RDS, press the DISP knob to change what appears
on the display. The display options are station name,
RDS station frequency, PTY, and the name of the
program (if available).
For XM™ (if equipped), press the DISP knob, while in
XM™ mode, to retrieve four different categories of
information related to the current song or channel:
Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel Number/
Channel Name.
To change the default on the display, press the
DISP knob until you see the display you want, then hold
the knob for two seconds. The radio will produce a beep
and the selected display will now be the default.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display will
show the selection.
ADJ (Adjust): Turn this knob to select radio stations.
© SEEK ¨: Press the right or the left arrow to
go to the next or to the previous station and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for
two seconds until you hear a beep. The radio will go to
a station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next station. Press either arrow again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either arrow
for more than four seconds until you hear two beeps.
The radio will go to the first preset station stored on
the pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go on
to the next preset station. Press either arrow again
to stop scanning presets.
The radio will only seek and scan stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
3-51
Setting Preset Stations
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programmed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
EQ (Tone): To adjust the bass or the treble, press and
release the EQ button until BASS or TREBLE appears
on the display. Turn the ADJ knob to increase or to
decrease. The display will show the bass or treble level.
If a station is weak or noisy, decrease the treble.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return and the equalization that
was selected will be stored for that pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-52
To adjust bass or treble to the middle position, select
BASS or TREBLE. Then press and hold the EQ button
for more than two seconds. You will hear a beep
and the level will be adjusted to the middle position.
To adjust the tone controls to the middle position, first end
out of tone by pressing another button, causing the radio
to perform that function, or by waiting five seconds for the
display to return to the default display. Then press and
hold the EQ button for more than two seconds until you
hear a beep. ALL CENTERED will appear on the display.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to select customized equalization settings designed
for country, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
x w (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance between
the right and the left speakers, press and release
the balance/fade button until BAL appears on the
display. Then turn the ADJ knob to move the sound
toward the right or the left speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press and release the balance/fade button
until FADE appears on the display. Then turn the
ADJ knob to move the sound toward the front or the
rear speakers.
To adjust the balance or the fade to the middle position,
select BAL or FADE. Then press and hold the balance/
fade button for more than two seconds. You will hear a
beep and the level will be adjusted to the middle position.
To adjust the speaker controls to the middle position, first
end out of balance and fade by pressing another button,
causing the radio to perform that function, or by waiting
five seconds for the display to return to the default
display. Then press and hold the balance/fade button for
more than two seconds until you hear a beep. ALL
CENTERED will appear on the display.
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(RDS and XM™)
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program
type select mode. PTY and a program type will
appear on the display.
2. Turn the ADJ knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press the
SEEK left arrow to select the PTY and to take you to
the PTY’s first station.
4. To go to another station within that PTY press the
SEEK left arrow again. If the radio cannot find the
desired PTY, NONE FOUND will appear on the
display and the radio will return to the last station
you were listening to.
After 15 seconds of inactivity or if the P-TYPE
button is pressed again, the radio will exit program
type select mode.
3-53
RDS Messages
Radio Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is low or
a CD is playing. If a CD is playing, play will stop during
the announcement. Alert announcements cannot be
turned off.
CALIBRATE: The audio system has been calibrated for
your vehicle from the factory. If CALIBRATE appears on
the display, it means that the radio has not been
configured properly for your vehicle and it must be
returned to your GM dealer for service.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
MSG (Message): If the current station has a message,
MSG will appear on the display. Press this button to
see the message. The message may display the artist,
song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the MSG button.
A new group of words will appear on the display after
every press of the button. Once the complete message
has been displayed, MSG will disappear from the display
until another new message is received. The last message
can be displayed by pressing the MSG button. You can
view the last message until a new message is received or
a different station is tuned to.
When a message is not available from a station,
NO MESSAGE will appear on the display.
3-54
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio.
Take the vehicle to your GM dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer.
For information on XM™ radio messages, see the XM™
Radio Messages table under “Radio with CD (MP3)”
later in this section.
Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing.
If you want to insert a CD with the ignition off, first press
the eject button or the DISP knob.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the player,
it will stay in the player. When the ignition or radio is
turned on the CD will start playing, where it stopped, if it
was the last selected audio source.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs without an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced due
to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality of
the music that has been recorded, and the way the CD-R
has been handled. There may be an increase in skipping,
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading and
ejecting. If these problems occur, check the bottom
surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is damaged,
such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD will not
play properly. If the surface of the CD is soiled, see Care
of Your CDs on page 3-72 for more information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt to play
scratched or damaged CDs, you could damage the
CD player. When using the CD player, use only CDs
in good condition without any label, load one CD at a
time, and keep the CD player and the loading slot free
of foreign materials, liquids, and debris.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
1 r (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release this pushbutton to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear on
the display.
2 [ (Fast Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton
to advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound
at a reduced volume. Release this pushbutton to
play the passage. The elapsed time of the track will
appear on the display.
5 y (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order.
RANDOM ON will appear on the display.
Turn the ADJ knob, while in random, to take you to the
previous or next track in sequential order.
Press RDM again to turn off random play, RANDOM
OFF will appear on the display.
6 N (Repeat): Press this pushbutton once to hear a
track over again. REPEAT ON and the repeat symbol
will appear on the display. The current track will continue
to repeat.
Turn the ADJ knob, while in repeat, to take you to the
previous or next track.
Press RPT again to turn off repeat play, REPEAT OFF
will appear on the display.
3-55
© SEEK ¨:
Press the left arrow to go to the start of the
current track if it has been playing for more than eight
seconds. Press the right arrow to go to the next track.
The track number will appear on the display. If either
arrow is pressed more than once, the player will continue
moving backward or forward through the CD.
If either arrow is held for more then two seconds, the CD
will enter CD scan mode and the CD will play the first
10 seconds of each track. Press this button again to stop
scanning.
DISP (Display): Press this knob to see how long the
current track has been playing. TRACK, the track
number, and the elapsed time of the track will appear
on the display. To change the default on the display,
time or elapsed time, press this knob until you see the
display you want, then hold the knob for two seconds.
The radio will produce one beep and the selected
display will now be the default.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to select the desired equalization setting while playing
a CD. The equalization will be automatically recalled
whenever a CD is played. For more information,
see AUTO EQ listed previously in this section.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a CD
is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely inside the
radio for future listening.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to play a CD or to
access a remote device (if installed) when listening to
the radio.
3-56
Z (Eject):
Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs
may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this
button is pressed first.
CD Messages
CHECK DISC: If this message appears on the display
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.
Radio with CD (MP3)
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters will appear on the display. RDS
stations may also provide the time of day, a program
type (PTY) for current programming, and the name
of the program being broadcast.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and in Canada (if available).
XM™ offers over 100 coast-to-coast channels including
music, news, sports, talk, and children’s programming.
XM™ provides digital quality audio and text information
that includes song title and artist name. A service fee is
required in order to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
3-57
Playing the Radio
O (Power):
Press this knob to turn the system on
and off.
u (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to decrease
the volume.
AUTO u (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, the audio system adjusts automatically to make
up for road and wind noise as you drive.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AUTO VOL LOW, AUTO
VOL MEDIUM, or AUTO VOL HIGH will appear on the
display. Each higher setting will allow for more volume
compensation at faster vehicle speeds. Then as you
drive, automatic volume increases the volume, as
necessary, to overcome noise at any speed. The volume
level should always sound the same to you as you drive.
AUTO VOL NONE will appear on the display if the radio
cannot determine the vehicle speed or if the engine is not
running. To turn automatic volume off, press this button
until AUTO VOL OFF appears on the display.
DISP (Display): When the ignition is off, press this
knob to display the time.
For RDS, press the DISP knob to change what appears
on the display. The display options are station name,
RDS station frequency, PTY, and the name of the
program (if available).
3-58
For XM™ (if equipped), press the DISP knob while in
XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories of
information related to the current song or channel:
Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel
Number/Channel Name.
To change the default on the display, press the DISP
knob until you see the display you want, then hold
the knob for two seconds. The radio will produce a beep
and the selected display will now be the default.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display will
show the selection.
ADJ (Adjust): Turn this knob to select radio stations.
© SEEK ¨: Press the right or the left arrow to
go to the next or to the previous station and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for
two seconds until you hear a beep. The radio will go to
a station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next station. Press either arrow again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either arrow for
more than four seconds until you hear two beeps. The
radio will go to the first preset station stored on the
pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next preset station. Press either arrow again to stop
scanning presets.
The radio will only seek and scan stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programmed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever
that numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return and the equalization that was
selected will be stored for that pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
EQ (Tone): To adjust the bass or the treble, press and
release the EQ button until BASS or TREBLE appears
on the display. Turn the ADJ knob to increase or to
decrease. The display will show the bass or treble level.
If a station is weak or noisy, decrease the treble.
To adjust bass or treble to the middle position, select
BASS or TREBLE. Then press and hold the EQ button
for more than two seconds. You will hear a beep
and the level will be adjusted to the middle position.
To adjust the tone controls to the middle position,
first end out of tone by pressing another button,
causing the radio to perform that function, or by waiting
five seconds for the display to return to the default
display. Then press and hold the EQ button for more than
two seconds until you hear a beep. ALL CENTERED will
appear on the display.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to select customized equalization settings designed
for country, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.
3-59
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
x w (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance between
the right and the left speakers, press and release
the balance/fade button until BAL appears on the
display. Then turn the ADJ knob to move the sound
toward the right or the left speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press and release the balance/fade button
until FADE appears on the display. Then turn the
ADJ knob to move the sound toward the front or the
rear speakers.
To adjust the balance or the fade to the middle position,
select BAL or FADE. Then press and hold the balance/
fade button for more than two seconds. You will hear a
beep and the level will be adjusted to the middle position.
To adjust the speaker controls to the middle position, first
end out of balance and fade by pressing another button,
causing the radio to perform that function, or by waiting
five seconds for the display to return to the default
display. Then press and hold the balance/fade button for
more than two seconds until you hear a beep. ALL
CENTERED will appear on the display.
3-60
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(RDS and XM™)
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program
type select mode. PTY and a program type will
appear on the display.
2. Turn the ADJ knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press the
SEEK left arrow to select the PTY and to take
you to the PTY’s first station.
4. To go to another station within that PTY press the
SEEK left arrow again. If the radio cannot find the
desired PTY, NONE FOUND will appear on the
display and the radio will return to the last station
you were listening to.
After 15 seconds of inactivity or if the P-TYPE
button is pressed again, the radio will exit program
type select mode.
RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current radio
station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will hear
the announcement, even if the volume is low or a CD is
playing. If a CD is playing, play will stop during the
announcement. Alert announcements cannot be
turned off.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by all
RDS stations.
MSG (Message): If the current station has a message,
MSG will appear on the display. Press this button to
see the message. The message may display the artist,
song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the MSG button.
A new group of words will appear on the display after
every press of the button. Once the complete message
has been displayed, MSG will disappear from the
display until another new message is received.
The last message can be displayed by pressing the
MSG button. You can view the last message until a new
message is received or a different station is tuned to.
When a message is not available from a station,
NO MESSAGE will appear on the display.
Radio Messages
CALIBRATE: The audio system has been calibrated for
your vehicle from the factory. If CALIBRATE appears
on the display, it means that the radio has not been
configured properly for your vehicle and it must
be returned to your GM dealer for service.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio. Take
the vehicle to your GM dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer.
3-61
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
XM Updating
Updating
encryption code
The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No XM Signal
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you move
into an open area, the signal should return.
Loading XM
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
Channel Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
Channel Unavail
Channel no longer
available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Artist Info
Artist Name/Feature not
available
No artist information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Title Info
Song/Program Title not
available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
3-62
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
No CAT Info
Category Name not
available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Information
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
CAT Not Found
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
XM Theft Locked
Theft lock active
The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously
been in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™
receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this
message appears after having your vehicle serviced, check
with your GM dealer.
XM Radio ID
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed
to activate the service.
Unknown
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
may be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
Check XM Receivr
Hardware failure in the
receiver module
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
Check XM
XM not available
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
3-63
Playing a CD
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing.
If you want to insert a CD with the ignition off, first press
the eject button or the DISP knob.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt to play
scratched or damaged CDs, you could damage the
CD player. When using the CD player, use only CDs
in good condition without any label, load one CD at a
time, and keep the CD player and the loading slot free
of foreign materials, liquids, and debris.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on the CD will start playing, where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs without an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced due
to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality of
the music that has been recorded, and the way the CD-R
has been handled. There may be an increase in skipping,
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading and
ejecting. If these problems occur, check the bottom
surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is damaged,
such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD will not
play properly. If the surface of the CD is soiled, see Care
of Your CDs on page 3-72 for more information.
1 r (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. The sound will be muted.
Release this pushbutton to play the passage. The
elapsed time of the track will appear on the display.
3-64
2 [ (Fast Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton
to advance quickly within a track. The sound will be
muted. Release this pushbutton to play the passage.
The elapsed time of the track will appear on the display.
5 y (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order.
RANDOM ON will appear on the display.
Turn the ADJ knob, while in random, to take you to the
previous or next track in sequential order.
Press RDM again to turn off random play, RANDOM
OFF will appear on the display.
6 N (Repeat): Press this pushbutton once to hear a
track over again. REPEAT ON and the repeat symbol
will appear on the display. The current track will continue
to repeat.
Turn the ADJ knob, while in repeat, to take you to the
previous or next track.
Press RPT again to turn off repeat play, REPEAT OFF
will appear on the display.
ADJ (Adjust): Turn this knob to go to the previous or
next track(s). Stop turning this knob to play the track.
DISP (Display): Press this knob to see how long
the current track has been playing. TRACK, the track
number, and the elapsed time of the track will appear
on the display. To change the default on the display,
time or elapsed time, press this knob until you see the
display you want, then hold the knob for two seconds.
The radio will produce one beep and the selected
display will now be the default.
MSG (Message): Press this button to display the text
on commercially recorded CDs (if available).
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to select the desired equalization setting while playing
a CD. The equalization will be automatically recalled
whenever a CD is played. For more information,
see AUTO EQ listed previously in this section.
Press the left arrow to go to the start of the
current track if it has been playing for more than
eight seconds. Press the right arrow to go to the next
track. The track number will appear on the display. If
either arrow is pressed more than once, the player will
continue moving backward or forward through the CD.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
If either arrow is held for more then two seconds, the CD
will enter CD scan mode and the CD will play the first
10 seconds of each track. Press this button again to stop
scanning.
Z (Eject):
© SEEK ¨:
SRCE (Source): Press this button to play a CD or to
access a remote device (if installed) when listening
to the radio.
Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs
may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this
button is pressed first.
3-65
Using an MP3 CD
MP3 Format
If you burn your own MP3 disc on a personal computer:
• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a
CD-R disc.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on
one disc.
• Make sure playlists have a.m3u or.wpl extension,
other file extensions may not work.
• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed or
variable bit rates. Song title, artist name, and album
will be available for display by the radio when
recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums
using one folder for each album. Each folder
or album should contain 18 songs or less.
• Make sure to finalize the disc when burning an
MP3 disc, using multiple sessions. It is usually
better to burn the disc all at once.
The player will be able to read and play a maximum of
50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files. Long
file names, folder names, or playlist names may use more
disc memory space than necessary.
3-66
To conserve space on the disc, minimize the length of
the file, folder or playlist names. You can also play an
MP3 CD that was recorded using no file folders. The
system can support up to 11 folders in depth, though,
keep the depth of the folders to a minimum in order to
keep down the complexity and confusion in trying to
locate a particular folder during playback. If a CD
contains more than the maximum of 50 folders,
50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files the player will let
you access and navigate up to the maximum, but all
items over the maximum will be ignored.
Root Directory
The root directory will be treated as a folder. If the root
directory has compressed audio files, the directory
will be displayed as F1 ROOT. All files contained directly
under the root directory will be accessed prior to any
root directory folders. However, playlists (Px) will always
be accessed before root folders or files.
Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
compressed files directly beneath them, the player will
advance to the next folder in the file structure that
contains compressed audio files and the empty folder
will not be displayed or numbered.
No Folder
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files
will be located under the root folder. The next and
previous folder functions will have no function on a CD
that was recorded without folders or playlists. When
displaying the name of the folder the radio will
display ROOT.
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files will be located under
the root folder. The folder down and the folder up
buttons will search playlists (Px) first and then go to the
root folder. When the radio displays the name of the
folder the radio will display ROOT.
Order of Play
Tracks will be played in the following order:
• Play will begin from the first track in the first playlist
and will continue sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has been played, play will continue from the first
track of the first folder.
• Play will begin from the first track in the first folder
When play enters a new folder, the display will not
automatically show the new folder name unless
you have chosen the folder mode as the default display.
See DISP later in this section for more information.
The new track name will appear on the display.
File System and Naming
The song name that will be displayed will be the song
name that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is
not present in the ID3 tag, then the radio will display the
file name without the extension (such as .mp3) as the
track name.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
will be shortened. The display will not show parts
of words on the last page of text and the extension of
the filename will not be displayed.
Preprogrammed Playlists
You can access preprogrammed playlists which were
created by WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™
software, however, you will not have editing capability.
These playlists will be treated as special folders
containing compressed audio song files.
and will continue sequentially through all tracks in
each folder. When the last track of the last folder has
been played, play will continue from the first track of
the first playlist.
3-67
Playing an MP3
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
With the ignition on, insert a CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull it in, and READING
DISC will appear on the display. The CD should begin
playing and the CD symbol will appear on the display.
If you want to insert a CD with the ignition off, first press
the eject button or the DISP knob.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.
If you turn off the ignition or radio with a CD in the
player it will stay in the player. When you turn on the
ignition or radio, the CD will start to play where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs without an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced due
to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality of
the music that has been recorded, and the way the CD-R
has been handled. There may be an increase in skipping,
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading and
ejecting. If these problems occur, check the bottom
surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is damaged,
such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD will not
play properly. If the surface of the CD is soiled, see Care
of Your CDs on page 3-72 for more information.
3-68
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt to play
scratched or damaged CDs, you could damage the
CD player. When using the CD player, use only CDs
in good condition without any label, load one CD at a
time, and keep the CD player and the loading slot free
of foreign materials, liquids, and debris.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
1 r (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at
eight times the normal playing speed. Release this
pushbutton to play the track. REV and the elapsed
time of the track will appear on the display.
2 [ (Fast Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton
to advance quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at
eight times the normal playing speed. Release this
pushbutton to play the track. FWD and the elapsed time
of the track will appear on the display.
3 ! (Previous Folder): Press this pushbutton to go to
the first track in the previous folder. Pressing this
pushbutton while in folder random mode will take you to
the previous folder and random the tracks in that folder.
6 N (Repeat): Press this pushbutton once to hear a
track over again. TRACK REPEAT ON or FLDR REPEAT
ON and the repeat symbol will appear on the display. The
current track will continue to repeat.
4 # (Next Folder): Press this pushbutton to go to the
first track in the next folder. Pressing this pushbutton
while in folder random mode will take you to the
next folder and random the tracks in that folder.
Turn the ADJ knob, while in repeat, to take you to the
previous or next track.
5 y (Random): To random the tracks in the current
folder or playlist, press and release this pushbutton.
Press Random again while FLDR RANDOM ON or PLST
RANDOM ON is being displayed and, DISR RANDOM
ON will then appear on the display. Once DISR RANDOM
ON is displayed, the radio will play tracks randomly
across entire disc. After all of the tracks in the current
folder or playlist have been played, the system will move
on to the next folder or playlist and play all of the tracks in
random order.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the previous track. Press the right arrow to go to
the start of the next track.
When in random, pressing and releasing either SEEK
arrow will take you to the next or previous random track.
DISP (Display): Press this knob to switch between
track and name, folder and name, and the elapsed time
of the track. The display will show only eight characters,
but there can be up to four pages of text. If there are
more than eight characters in the song, folder, or playlist
name, pressing this knob within two seconds will take
you to the next page of text. If there are no other pages
to be shown, pressing this knob within two seconds
will take you to the next display mode.
Turn the ADJ knob, while in random, to take you to the
previous or next track in sequential order.
Press and release this pushbutton again to turn off
random play, RANDOM OFF will appear on the display.
Press RPT again to turn off repeat play, REPEAT OFF
will appear on the display.
To scan tracks, press either arrow for more than
two seconds to enter CD scan mode. The CD will play
the first 10 seconds of each track. Press either arrow
again to stop scanning.
ADJ (Adjust): Turn this knob to go to the previous or
next track(s). Stop turning this knob to play the track.
3-69
To change the default on the display, press the DISP
knob until you see the display you want, then hold
this knob for two seconds.
MSG (Message): MSG will appear on the display
whenever a current track has ID3 tag information. Press
this button to display the artist name and album contained
in the tag. MSG will disappear from the display when the
information in the ID3 tag has finished.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to play a CD or to
access a remote device (if installed) when listening
to the radio.
Z (Eject):
Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs
may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this
button is pressed first.
CD Messages
CHECK DISC: If this message appears on the display
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
3-70
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• The format of the CD may not be compatible.
See “MP3 Format” earlier in this section.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically by
learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it
will not operate and LOCK or LOCKED will appear on
the display.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will not operate
if stolen.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
1–6 (Preset Pushbuttons): Press this button to play
stations that are programmed on the radio preset
pushbuttons. The radio will only seek preset stations
with a strong signal that are in the selected band.
x u w (Volume): Press the up or the down arrow
to increase or to decrease the volume.
0 (Mute):
Press this button to silence the system.
Press this button again, or any other radio button, to turn
the sound on.
Mute is unavailable when OnStar™ (if equipped) is
active.
If your vehicle has this feature, some audio controls can
be adjusted at the steering wheel. They include the
following:
x SEEK w:
Press the up or the down arrow to go to
the next or to the previous radio station and stay there.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal that
are in the selected band.
When a CD is playing, press the up or the down arrow to
go to the next or previous track.
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped).
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
listening to the radio and a CD. The inactive CD
will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
Radio Reception
You may experience frequency interference and static
during normal radio reception if items such as cellphone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external
electronic devices are plugged into the accessory power
outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the item
from the accessory power outlet.
3-71
AM
Care of Your CDs
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause station
frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations will boost the power
levels during the day, and then reduce these levels during
the night. Static can also occur when things like storms
and power lines interfere with radio reception. When this
happens, try reducing the treble on your radio.
FM Stereo
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. The CD player scans the bottom surface of the
disc. If the surface of a CD is damaged, such as cracked,
broken, or scratched, the CD will not play properly or not
at all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint free
cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral
detergent solution mixed with water, and clean it. Make
sure the wiping process starts from the center to
the edge.
FM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signals will
reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing
the sound to fade in and out.
Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while handling it;
this could damage the surface. Pick up CDs by grasping
the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the
outer edge.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception
from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United States,
and in Canada (if available). Just as with FM, tall
buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals,
causing the sound to fade in and out. In addition,
traveling or standing under heavy foliage, bridges,
garages, or tunnels may cause loss of XM signal for a
period of time. The radio may display NO XM SIGNAL
to indicate interference.
3-72
Care of the CD Player
The use of CD lens cleaners for CD players is not
advised, due to the risk of contaminating the internal
lens of the CD optics with lubricants.
Fixed Mast Antenna
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast should ever become
slightly bent, straighten it out by hand. If the mast is badly
bent, replace it.
Check occasionally to make sure the mast is still
tightened to the fender. If tightening is required, tighten
by hand, then with a wrench one quarter turn.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof
of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and
ice build up for clear radio reception.
If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the
XM™ system may be affected if the sunroof is open.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere
with the performance of the XM™ system. Make sure
the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is not obstructed.
3-73
✍ NOTES
3-74
Section 4
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2
Drunken Driving .............................................4-3
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-6
Braking .........................................................4-6
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .........................4-7
Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-9
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) .....................4-9
Limited-Slip Differential ..................................4-11
Steering ......................................................4-11
Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-13
Passing .......................................................4-14
Loss of Control .............................................4-15
Racing or Other Competitive Driving ................4-17
Driving at Night ............................................4-17
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-18
City Driving ..................................................4-20
Freeway Driving ...........................................4-21
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-22
Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-23
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-24
Winter Driving ..............................................4-26
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow .....................................4-30
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-31
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-31
Towing ..........................................................4-36
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-36
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-36
Towing a Trailer (Automatic Transaxle) ............4-39
Towing a Trailer (Manual Transaxle) ................4-46
4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive
defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 1-12.
4-2
{CAUTION:
Defensive driving really means “Be ready for
anything.” On city streets, rural roads, or
expressways, it means “Always expect the
unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians or other
drivers are going to be careless and make
mistakes. Anticipate what they might do and
be ready. Rear-end collisions are about the
most preventable of accidents. Yet they are
common. Allow enough following distance.
Defensive driving requires that a driver
concentrate on the driving task. Anything that
distracts from the driving task makes proper
defensive driving more difficult and can even
cause a collision, with resulting injury. Ask a
passenger to help do these things, or pull off
the road in a safe place to do them. These
simple defensive driving techniques could
save your life.
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor
to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000 people injured.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21, it is
against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol. There
are good medical, psychological, and developmental
reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway safety
problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then
drive. But what if people do? How much is “too much” if
someone plans to drive? It is a lot less than many might
think. Although it depends on each person and situation,
here is some general information on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol
4-3
According to the American Medical Association, a
180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a
BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.
A person who consumes food just before or during
drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a man of her same body weight will when
each has the same number of drinks.
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout Canada,
sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In some other
countries, the limit is even lower. For example, it is
0.05 percent in both France and Germany. The BAC
limit for all commercial drivers in the United States is
0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen, it
depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and how
quickly the person drinks them.
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent.
4-4
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night.
All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above
0.05 percent. Statistics show that the chance of being
in a collision increases sharply for drivers who have a
BAC of 0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level
of 0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision.
At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this driver
having a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of
0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the
right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need
to take sudden action, as when a child darts into
the street? A person with even a moderate BAC might
not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the
collision.
There is something else about drinking and driving that
many people do not know. Medical research shows
that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash
injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal
cord, or heart. This means that when anyone who has
been drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash,
that person’s chance of being killed or permanently
disabled is higher than if the person had not been
drinking.
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Please do not drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a
cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
4-5
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
You have three systems that make your vehicle go
where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the
steering, and the accelerator. All three systems
have to do their work at the places where the tires
meet the road.
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-29.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, it is
easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires
and road can provide. That means you can lose control of
your vehicle. See Enhanced Traction System (ETS) on
page 4-9.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
4-6
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement
or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is
wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of your brakes;
the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake
force applied.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool
between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake
normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle may have the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), an advanced electronic braking system that will
help prevent a braking skid.
If your vehicle has ABS,
this warning light on the
instrument panel will come
on briefly when you
start your vehicle.
When you start your engine, or when you begin to drive
away, your ABS will check itself. You may hear a
momentary motor or clicking noise while this test is
going on, and you may even notice that your brake
pedal moves or pulses a little. This is normal.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
4-7
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each wheel.
ABS can change the brake pressure faster than any
driver could. The computer is programmed to make the
most of available tire and road conditions. This can
help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
4-8
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
Remember: ABS not change the time you need to get
your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
front of you, you will not have time to apply your brakes
if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave
enough room up ahead to stop, even though you
have ABS.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel
a slight brake pedal pulsation or notice some noise,
but this is normal.
In an emergency, you will probably want to squeeze the
brakes hard without locking the wheels. If you hear or feel
the wheels sliding, ease off the brake pedal. This will help
you retain steering control. If you do have ABS, it is
different. See Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) on
page 4-7.
Braking in Emergencies
In many emergencies, steering can help you more than
even the very best braking.
At some time, nearly every driver gets into a situation
that requires hard braking.
Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
If you have ABS, you can steer and brake at the same
time. However, if you do not have ABS, your first
reaction — to hit the brake pedal hard and hold it
down — may be the wrong thing to do. Your wheels can
stop rolling. Once they do, the vehicle cannot respond
to your steering. Momentum will carry it in whatever
direction it was headed when the wheels stopped rolling.
That could be off the road, into the very thing you were
trying to avoid, or into traffic.
Your vehicle may have an Enhanced Traction System
(ETS) that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in
slippery road conditions. The system operates only if it
senses that one or both of the front wheels are spinning
or beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the
system reduces engine power and may also upshift the
transaxle to limit wheel spin. You may feel or hear the
system working, but this is normal.
If you do not have ABS, use a “squeeze” braking
technique. This will give you maximum braking while
maintaining steering control. You can do this by pushing
on the brake pedal with steadily increasing pressure.
A LOW TRACTION message will appear on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) when the traction control
system is actively limiting wheel spin. Slippery road
conditions may exist if this message is displayed, so
adjust your driving accordingly.
4-9
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the Enhanced
Traction System begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may
re-engage the cruise control. See Cruise Control on
page 3-10.
When the system is on,
this warning light will
come on to let you know
there’s a problem.
If the warning light stays on, or comes on when you’re
driving, there may be a problem with your Enhanced
Traction System and your vehicle may need service.
When this warning light is on, the system will not
limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
The Enhanced Traction System warning light may come
on for the following reasons:
• If you turn the system off by moving the shift lever
to FIRST (1), the warning light will come on and
stay on. To turn the system back on, move the shift
lever back to a position other than FIRST (1).
The warning light should go off.
• The warning light will come on when you set your
parking brake with the engine running, and it will
stay on if your parking brake does not release fully.
If the transaxle shift lever is in any position other
than FIRST (1) and the warning light stays on after
your parking brake is fully released, it means
there is a problem with the system.
• If the traction control system is affected by an
engine related problem, the system will turn off and
the warning light will come on.
If the Enhanced Traction System warning light comes
on and stays on for an extended period of time when
the transaxle shift lever is in any position other than
FIRST (1), your vehicle needs service.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3 for more information.
4-10
Limited-Slip Differential
Steering Tips
Your vehicle may have this feature. A limited-slip
transaxle can give you additional traction on snow, mud,
ice, sand or gravel. It works like a standard transaxle
most of the time, but when one of the front wheels loses
traction, this feature will allow the wheel with traction
to move the vehicle.
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves. The
traction of the tires against the road surface makes it
possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn
the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia will keep
the vehicle going in the same direction. If you have
ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you will
understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you are
in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Both control
systems — steering and braking — have to do their
work where the tires meet the road. Unless you have
four-wheel anti-lock brakes, adding the hard braking can
demand too much of those places. You can lose control.
The same thing can happen if you are steering through a
sharp curve and you suddenly accelerate. Those two
control systems — steering and acceleration — can
overwhelm those places where the tires meet the road
and make you lose control. See Enhanced Traction
System (ETS) on page 4-9.
Steering
Electric Power Steering
If the engine stalls while you are driving, the power
steering assist system will continue to operate until you
are able to stop your vehicle. If you lose power steering
assist because the electric power steering system is not
functioning, you can steer, but it will take more effort.
If you turn the steering wheel in either direction several
times until it stops, or hold the steering wheel in the
stopped position for an extended amount of time, you
may notice a reduced amount of power steering
assist. The normal amount of power steering assist
should return shortly after a few normal steering
movements.
The electric power steering system does not require
regular maintenance. If you suspect steering system
problems and/or the POWER STEERING message
comes on, contact your dealer for service repairs.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-40.
4-11
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the brake or accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way
you want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
4-12
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You
can avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.
That is the time for evasive action — steering around the
problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes — but, unless you
have anti-lock brakes, not enough to lock your wheels.
See Braking on page 4-6. It is better to remove as
much speed as you can from a possible collision. Then
steer around the problem, to the left or right depending
on the space available.
Off-Road Recovery
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the
edge of a road onto the shoulder while you are driving.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer
so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
You can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn
until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then
turn your steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.
4-13
Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides and
to crossroads for situations that might affect your
passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever
about making a successful pass, wait for a
better time.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken center line usually indicates it is all
right to pass, providing the road ahead is clear.
Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or
a double solid line, even if the road seems empty
of approaching traffic.
4-14
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For
one thing, following too closely reduces your area
of vision, especially if you are following a larger
vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space if
the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops.
Keep back a reasonable distance.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and do
not get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into the
other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have
a running start that more than makes up for the
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel your
pass, you need only slow down and drop back again
and wait for another opportunity.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
wait your turn. But take care that someone is not
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder
and check the blind spot.
• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your
inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal
and move back into the right lane. Remember that
your passenger side outside mirror is convex. The
vehicle you just passed may seem to be farther away
from you than it really is.
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the next
vehicle.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may
be slowing down or starting to turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you
can ease a little to the right.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
4-15
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
If you have the Enhanced Traction System (ETS),
remember: It helps to avoid only the acceleration skid.
See Enhanced Traction System (ETS) on page 4-9.
If you do not have the Enhanced Traction System,
or if the system is off, then an acceleration skid is
also best handled by easing your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you
will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
4-16
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your
best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or braking,
including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower
gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide.
You may not realize the surface is slippery until your
vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed
snow on the road to make a mirrored surface — and
slow down when you have any doubt.
If you have the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),
remember: It helps avoid only the braking skid. If you do
not have ABS, then in a braking skid, where the wheels
are no longer rolling, release enough pressure on the
brakes to get the wheels rolling again. This restores
steering control. Push the brake pedal down steadily
when you have to stop suddenly. As long as the wheels
are rolling, you will have steering control.
Racing or Other Competitive Driving
See your warranty book before using your vehicle for
racing or other competitive driving. After reviewing your
warranty book, please see the GM Performance Parts
website or catalog and contact the race sanctioning
bodies, for example Sports Car Club of America (SCCA)
or Grand American, for parts and equipment required for
racing or other competitive driving.
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare
from headlamps behind you.
• Since you cannot see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
vehicle’s headlamps can light up only so much road
ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But as we get older these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will
have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you are driving,
do not wear sunglasses at night. They may cut down on
glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot of things
invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark. When you
are faced with severe glare, as from a driver who does
not lower the high beams, or a vehicle with misaimed
headlamps, slow down a little. Avoid staring directly into
the approaching headlamps.
4-17
Keep the windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Remember that the headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your eyes
moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly lighted
objects. Just as the headlamps should be checked
regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes be
examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night
blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and
are not even aware of it.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as well
because your tire-to-road traction is not as good as on dry
roads. And, if your tires do not have much tread left, you
will get even less traction. It is always wise to go slower
and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving.
The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes
are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
4-18
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain
can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals,
pavement markings, the edge of the road, and even
people walking.
It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment
in good shape and keep your windshield washer fluid
reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace your windshield
wiper inserts when they show signs of streaking or
missing areas on the windshield, or when strips of
rubber start to separate from the inserts.
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle. After driving through a large
puddle of water or a car wash, apply your
brake pedal lightly until your brakes work
normally.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you cannot, try to slow down before you
hit them.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning,
it has little or no contact with the road.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or
more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing on
the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone
poles, or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’s
surface, there could be hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle.
If you cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water,
drive through them very slowly.
4-19
Driving Through Flowing Water
City Driving
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can
be carried away. As little as six inches of
flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle.
If this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you
pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear
room ahead, and be prepared to have your
view restricted by road spray.
• Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 5-56.
4-20
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
Freeway Driving
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for
a cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and energy.
See Freeway Driving on page 4-21.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes, or superhighways — are the
safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep up
with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same speed
most of the other drivers are driving. Too-fast or too-slow
driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on
a freeway as a passing lane.
4-21
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check
traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with
the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the
prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your
mirrors, and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in
your blind spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance.
Expect to move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do
not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive
on to the next exit.
4-22
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce your speed
according to your speedometer, not to your sense
of motion. After driving for any distance at higher
speeds, you may tend to think you are going slower
than you actually are.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you are not fresh — such as after a day’s
work — do not plan to make too many miles that first part
of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you
can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you
will find experienced and able service experts in GM
dealerships all across North America. They will be ready
and willing to help if you need it.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are
all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated
to the recommended pressure?
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
Highway Hypnosis
Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with the
same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the wind
against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Do not let it
happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the road
in less than a second, and you could crash and be
injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service, or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.
4-23
Hill and Mountain Roads
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system,
and transaxle. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let your engine assist your brakes on a
steep downhill slope.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
4-24
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down. They could
get so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always
have your engine running and your vehicle in
gear when you go downhill.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your
engine and transaxle, and you can climb the
hill better.
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide
or cut across the center of the road. Drive at
speeds that let you stay in your own lane.
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled car
or an accident.
• You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks
area, or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
appropriate action.
4-25
Winter Driving
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply
of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer
clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth, and a
couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be
driving under severe conditions, include a small bag of
sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags to
help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure these
items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where the tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You will
have a lot less traction, or grip, and will need to be
very careful.
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
Also see Tires on page 5-56.
4-26
If you have the Enhanced Traction System (ETS), keep
the transaxle shift lever in AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D)
so the system will be able to improve your ability to
accelerate when driving on a slippery road. Even though
your vehicle has this system, you will want to slow down
and adjust your driving to the road conditions. Under
certain conditions, you may want to turn the traction
system off, such as when driving through deep snow and
loose gravel, to help maintain vehicle motion at lower
speeds. See Enhanced Traction System (ETS) on
page 4-9.
If you do not have ETS, accelerate gently. Try not to
break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too fast, the
drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under
the tires even more.
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice can
be even more trouble because it may offer the least
traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall. Try
to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews can
get there.
Unless you have the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), you
will want to brake very gently, too. If you do have ABS,
see Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) on page 4-7. This
system improves your vehicle’s stability when you make a
hard stop on a slippery road. Whether you have ABS or
not, you will want to begin stopping sooner than you
would on dry pavement. Without ABS, if you feel your
vehicle begin to slide, let up on the brakes a little. Push
the brake pedal down steadily to get the most traction
you can.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
4-27
Remember, unless you have ABS, if you brake so hard
that your wheels stop rolling, you will just slide. Brake
so your wheels always keep rolling and you can
still steer.
• Whatever your braking system, allow greater
following distance on any slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun cannot reach, such as
around clumps of trees, behind buildings, or under
bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve or an
overpass may remain icy when the surrounding
roads are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of
you, brake before you are on it. Try not to brake
while you are actually on the ice, and avoid sudden
steering maneuvers.
4-28
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,
rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the base
of your vehicle, especially any that is blocking
your exhaust pipe. And check around again
from time to time to be sure snow does not
collect there.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will help
keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster
than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This
uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the
battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to
restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with
your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
4-29
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost all
the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again and
repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from
the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the fuel
as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get out
of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will need
to spin the wheels, but you do not want to spin your
wheels too fast. The method known as rocking can help
you get out when you are stuck, but you must use
caution.
{CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can
explode, and you or others could be injured.
And, the transaxle or other parts of the vehicle
can overheat. That could cause an engine
compartment fire or other damage. When you
are stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible.
Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h)
as shown on the speedometer.
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts
of your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transaxle back
and forth, you can destroy your transaxle. See
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-31.
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
see Tire Chains on page 5-72.
4-30
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Loading Your Vehicle
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That
will clear the area around your front wheels. Then shift
back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward
gear, or with a manual transaxle, between FIRST (1) or
SECOND (2) and REVERSE (R), spinning the wheels
as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal while
you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal
when the transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinning your
wheels in the forward and reverse directions, you
will cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle.
If that does not get you out after a few tries, you
may need to be towed out. If you do need to be towed
out, see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-36.
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants,
cargo and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels
on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly
carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and the
Certification label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
4-31
Tire and Loading Information Label
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the
tire size of the original equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For more
information on tires and inflation see Tires on page 5-56
and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-63.
There is also important loading information on the
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for the front and rear axle; see “Certification
Label” later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle placard.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is
attached to the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). With
the driver’s door open, you will find the label either
attached above the door lock post for a two door vehicle
or below the door lock post for a four door vehicle.
The tire and loading information label shows the number
of occupant seating positions (A), and the maximum
vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.
4-32
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be
five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount
of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
may not safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing a
Trailer (Automatic Transaxle) on page 4-39 or
Towing a Trailer (Manual Transaxle) on page 4-46
for important information on towing a trailer,
towing safety rules, and trailering tips.
Example 1
Item
A
B
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 1 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
4-33
Example 2
Item
A
B
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 2 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Example 3
Total
Item
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
750 lbs (340 kg)
B
250 lbs (113 kg)
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 3 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information
label for specific information about your vehicle’s
capacity weight and seating positions. The combined
weight of the driver, passengers, and cargo should
never exceed your vehicle’s capacity weight.
4-34
Certification Label
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread
it out. Do not carry more than 141 lbs (64 kg) in your
vehicle’s trunk. See “Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit” earlier in this section.
{CAUTION:
A vehicle specific Certification label, found on the rear
edge of the driver’s door, tells you the gross weight
capacity of your vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of
the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo. Never exceed
the GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for either the front or rear axle.
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
4-35
If you put things inside your vehicle — like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else — they will go as fast
as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn
quickly, or if there is a crash, they will keep going.
{CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle. In a
trunk, put them as far forward as you can.
Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
4-36
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See
Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle — such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your
vehicle with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly
towing” (towing your vehicle with two wheels on
the ground and two wheels up on a device known
as a “dolly”).
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
Dinghy Towing
You may dinghy tow your vehicle from the front following
these steps:
• What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you
will want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to
be towed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip
on page 4-22.
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition key to ACC to unlock the
steering wheel.
3. Shift your transaxle to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Release the parking brake.
To prevent the battery from draining while the vehicle is
being towed, remove the following fuse from the floor
console fuse block: 8 (Ignition Switch, PASS-Key® III+).
See Floor Console Fuse Block on page 5-99 for
more information.
4-37
Remember to reinstall the fuse once you have reached
your destination.
Notice: If you exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) while
towing your vehicle, it could be damaged. Never
exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) while towing your vehicle.
Notice: Towing your vehicle from the rear could
damage it. Also, repairs would not be covered by the
warranty. Never have your vehicle towed from
the rear.
4-38
Dolly Towing
Your vehicle cannot be dolly towed, but can be dinghy
towed. See “Dinghy Towing” earlier in this section.
Notice: Dolly towing your vehicle may cause
damage because of reduced ground clearance.
Always tow your vehicle using the dinghy towing
procedure listed in this section or put your vehicle
on a flatbed truck.
Towing a Trailer
(Automatic Transaxle)
{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. You may also damage your
vehicle; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only if
you have followed all the steps in this section.
Ask your dealer for advice and information
about towing a trailer with your vehicle.
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the
proper trailer towing equipment. If your vehicle is not
equipped as stated above, do not tow a trailer. To identify
the trailering capacity of your vehicle, you should read the
information in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears later in
this section. Trailering is different than just driving your
vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes in handling,
acceleration, braking, durability and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment,
and it has to be used properly.
That is the reason for this part. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your safety and that of
your passengers. So please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle,
wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder
against the drag of the added weight. The engine is
required to operate at relatively higher speeds and under
greater loads, generating extra heat. Also, the trailer adds
considerably to wind resistance, increasing the pulling
requirements.
4-39
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live but also
where you will be driving. A good source for this
information can be state or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch
dealer about sway controls.
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles
(1 600 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you tow
a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do
not make starts at full throttle. This helps your engine
and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier
loads.
• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Do not drive faster than the maximum posted speed
for trailers, or no more than 55 mph (90 km/h), to
save wear on your vehicle’s parts.
• Do not tow when the outside air temperature is
above 100°F (38°C).
• Do not tow more than 1,000 miles (1 600 km)
per year.
4-40
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• The weight of the trailer
• The weight of the trailer tongue
• The total weight on your vehicle’s tires
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg). But
even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For example,
speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and
how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all
important. It can also depend on any special equipment
that you have on your vehicle, and the amount of tongue
weight the vehicle can carry. See “Weight of the Trailer
Tongue” later in this section for more information.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo must be subtracted
from the maximum trailer weight.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
In Canada write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario, L1H 8P7
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight of
your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes
the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you may carry in
it, and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. If you
have a lot of options, equipment, passengers, or cargo in
your vehicle, it will reduce the tongue weight your vehicle
can carry, which will also reduce the trailer weight your
vehicle can tow. And if you tow a trailer, you must add the
tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be
carrying that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-31 for more information about your vehicle’s
maximum load capacity.
If you are using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer
tongue (A) should weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total
loaded trailer weight (B).
After you have loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they are not, you may be able to get them right
simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper
limit for cold tires. You will find these numbers on the
Tire-Loading Information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-31. Then be sure you do not go over the GVW
limit for your vehicle, including the weight of the trailer
tongue.
4-41
Hitches
Safety Chains
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why you will need the right hitch. Here
are some rules to follow:
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue
of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the road if
it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions about
safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer
or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s
recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not
attach them to the bumper. Always leave just enough
slack so you can turn with your rig. And, never allow
safety chains to drag on the ground.
• The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended
for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or
other bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a
frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to
the bumper.
• Will you have to make any holes in the body of your
vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If you do, then
be sure to seal the holes later when you remove the
hitch. If you do not seal them, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into your
vehicle. See Engine Exhaust on page 2-32. Dirt and
water can also enter the vehicle.
4-42
Trailer Brakes
Does your trailer have its own brakes? Be sure to read
and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so
you will be able to install, adjust and maintain them
properly. Do not try to tap into your vehicle’s brake
system. If you do, both brake systems will not work well,
or at all.
Driving with a Trailer
Following Distance
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you will want to
get to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then
apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
Passing
You will need more passing distance up ahead when
you are towing a trailer. And, because the vehicle
is a good deal longer, you will need to go much farther
beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to
your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
4-43
Making Turns
Driving on Grades
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
Notice: Do not tow on steep continuous grades
exceeding 6 miles (9.6 km). Extended, higher
than normal engine and transaxle temperatures may
result and damage your vehicle. Frequent stops
are very important to allow the engine and transaxle
to cool.
When you are turning with a trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this so your trailer will not strike
soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need a different
turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Check with your
dealer. The arrows on your instrument panel will flash
whenever you signal a turn or lane change. Properly
hooked up, the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other
drivers you are about to turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It
is important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
4-44
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you do not shift down,
you might have to use your brakes so much that they
would get hot and no longer work well.
Pay attention to the engine coolant gage. If the indicator
is in the red area, turn off the air conditioning to
reduce engine load. See Engine Overheating on
page 5-29.
Parking on Hills
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here is
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but do not shift into
PARK (P) for an automatic transaxle, or into
gear for a manual transaxle. When parking uphill,
turn your wheels away from the curb. When parking
downhill, turn your wheels into the curb.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake, and then shift into PARK (P) for
an automatic transaxle or REVERSE (R) for
a manual transaxle.
5. Release the regular brakes.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
• Start your engine.
• Shift into a gear.
• Release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
4-45
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you are
pulling a trailer. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
for more on this. Things that are especially important in
trailer operation are transaxle fluid (do not overfill), engine
oil, drive belt, cooling system and brake system.
Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during
severe operating conditions. See Engine Overheating on
page 5-29.
Each of these is covered in this manual, and the Index
will help you find them quickly. If you are trailering,
it is a good idea to review this information before you
start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
4-46
Towing a Trailer (Manual Transaxle)
Do not tow a trailer if your vehicle is equipped with a
manual transaxle. If you have the Cobalt SS, you
can tow a trailer. See “Towing a Trailer” in the Index
for more information.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................5-3
Accessories and Modifications ..........................5-3
California Proposition 65 Warning .....................5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle ..............................................5-5
Fuel ................................................................5-5
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-6
California Fuel ...............................................5-6
Additives .......................................................5-6
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-7
Filling the Tank ..............................................5-8
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................5-10
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10
Hood Release ..............................................5-11
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12
Engine Oil ...................................................5-15
Engine Oil Life System ..................................5-20
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-21
Automatic Transaxle Fluid ..............................5-23
Manual Transaxle Fluid ..................................5-23
Hydraulic Clutch ...........................................5-23
Engine Coolant .............................................5-24
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ..................5-29
Engine Overheating .......................................5-29
Cooling System ............................................5-31
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-37
Brakes ........................................................5-38
Battery ........................................................5-41
Jump Starting ...............................................5-42
Headlamp Aiming ...........................................5-46
Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-49
Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-49
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
and Parking Lamps ....................................5-50
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) .........5-51
Taillamps and Turn Signal Lamps (Coupe) .......5-52
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps (Sedan) .............................5-53
Back-Up Lamps (Coupe) ................................5-54
Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-55
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-55
Tires ..............................................................5-56
Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................5-58
Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................5-60
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-63
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-65
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-66
Buying New Tires .........................................5-66
Different Size Tires and Wheels ......................5-68
5-1
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-68
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-70
Wheel Replacement ......................................5-70
Tire Chains ..................................................5-72
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-73
Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-74
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................5-75
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire ................................................5-80
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............5-85
Compact Spare Tire ......................................5-88
Appearance Care ............................................5-88
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .................5-88
Fabric/Carpet ...............................................5-90
Leather .......................................................5-90
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces ..................................................5-91
Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-91
Weatherstrips ...............................................5-91
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................5-92
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .....................5-92
Finish Care ..................................................5-92
5-2
Windshield and Wiper Blades .........................5-93
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ................5-93
Tires ...........................................................5-94
Sheet Metal Damage .....................................5-94
Finish Damage .............................................5-94
Underbody Maintenance ................................5-95
Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-95
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..................5-95
Vehicle Identification ......................................5-96
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................5-96
Service Parts Identification Label .....................5-97
Electrical System ............................................5-97
Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................5-97
Headlamp Wiring ..........................................5-98
Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................5-98
Power Windows and Other Power Options .......5-98
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................5-98
Floor Console Fuse Block ..............................5-99
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ...................5-101
Capacities and Specifications ........................5-107
Service
Accessories and Modifications
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer
for all your service needs. You will get genuine GM parts
and GM-trained and supported service people.
When you add non-GM accessories to your vehicle they
can affect your vehicle’s performance and safety,
including such things as, airbags, braking, stability, ride
and handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics,
durability, and electronic systems like anti-lock brakes,
traction control and stability control. Some of these
accessories may even cause malfunction or damage not
covered by warranty.
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all
GM. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle. Your
GM dealer can accessorize your vehicle using genuine
GM Accessories. When you go to your GM dealer
and ask for GM Accessories, you will know that
GM-trained and supported service technicians will
perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
5-4
If you want to do some of your own service work, you will
want to use the proper service manual. It tells you much
more about how to service your vehicle than this manual
can. To order the proper service manual, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-14.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-66.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See Maintenance Record on page 6-15.
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind noise
and affect windshield washer performance. Check with
your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of
your vehicle.
Fuel
The 8th digit of your vehicle identification number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies your
engine. You will find the VIN at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) on page 5-96.
Gasoline Octane
If your vehicle has the 2.2L L4 engine (VIN Code F),
use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87,
you may notice an audible knocking noise when you
drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. If you are using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, your
engine needs service.
If your vehicle has the 2.4L L4 engine (VIN Code B) or the
2.0L Supercharged engine (VIN Code P), use premium
unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of 91 or
higher. You may also use regular unleaded gasoline
rated at 87 octane or higher, but your vehicle’s
acceleration may be slightly reduced, and you may notice
a slight audible knocking noise, commonly referred to as
spark knock. If the octane is less than 87, you may notice
a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this occurs,
use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. Otherwise, you might damage your engine. If
you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and
you hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service.
5-5
Gasoline Specifications
Additives
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM
specification D 4814 in the United States or
CAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines may
contain an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
General Motors recommends against the use of
gasolines containing MMT. See Additives on page 5-6
for additional information.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work properly.
In most cases, you should not have to add anything to
your fuel. However, some gasolines contain only the
minimum amount of additive required to meet U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency regulations. To help
keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean, or if your
vehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors or
valves, look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline. Also, your GM dealer has additives
that will help correct and prevent most deposit-related
problems.
California Fuel
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. See the underhood emission
control label. If this fuel is not available in states adopting
California emissions standards, your vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but
emission control system performance may be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on and your
vehicle may fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 3-32. If this occurs, return to
your authorized GM dealer for diagnosis. If it is
determined that the condition is caused by the type
of fuel used, repairs may not be covered by your
warranty.
5-6
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in
your area. General Motors recommends that you use
these gasolines if they comply with the specifications
described earlier. However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other
fuels containing more than 10% ethanol must not be used
in vehicles that were not designed for those fuels.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be covered under
your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors
recommends against the use of such gasolines. Fuels
containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs
and the performance of the emission control system may
be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn
on. If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer
for service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
5-7
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to
you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials
away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump
unattended when refueling your vehicle — this
is against the law in some places. Keep
children away from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released
too soon, it will spring back to the right.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.
5-8
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,
you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out
on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly
full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open
the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise
to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Washing Your
Vehicle on page 5-92.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The diagnostic
system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate
into the atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-32.
The CHECK GAS CAP message will be displayed on
the Driver Information Center (DIC) if the fuel cap is not
properly installed. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-40 for more information.
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions
system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-32.
5-9
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
5-10
{CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following.
1. Pull the interior hood
release lever with this
symbol on it. It is
located under the
instrument panel on
the driver’s side of the
vehicle.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and push the
secondary hood release lever to the left. It is
located under the front center of the hood toward
the driver’s side of the vehicle.
3. After you have partially lifted the hood, a gas strut
will automatically take over to lift and hold the hood
in the fully open position.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps
are on properly. Lower the hood until the lifting force
of the strut is reduced, then release the hood to
latch fully. Check to make sure the hood is closed
and repeat the process if necessary.
5-11
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the 2.2L L4 engine (2.4L L4 engine similar), here is what you will see:
5-12
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-21.
B. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-15.
C. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “Checking
Engine Oil” under Engine Oil on page 5-15.
D. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
under Brakes on page 5-38 and Hydraulic Clutch
on page 5-23.
E. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See Engine
Compartment Fuse Block on page 5-101.
F. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on
page 5-42.
G. Remote Negative (−) Terminal. See Jump Starting
on page 5-42.
H. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See Cooling System on
page 5-31.
I. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-37.
5-13
When you open the hood on the 2.0L L4 Supercharged engine, here is what you will see:
5-14
A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-37.
B. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-15.
C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-15.
D. Intercooler System Pressure Cap. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-24.
E. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
under Brakes on page 5-38 and Hydraulic Clutch
on page 5-23.
F. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See Engine
Compartment Fuse Block on page 5-101.
G. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on
page 5-42.
H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal. See Jump Starting
on page 5-42.
I. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See Cooling System on
page 5-31.
J. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-21.
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
5-15
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is below the MIN (minimum) mark, you will
need to add at least one quart/liter of oil. But you must
use the right kind. This section explains what kind of
oil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see
Capacities and Specifications on page 5-107.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If your engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the upper
mark that shows the proper operating range,
your engine could be damaged.
5-16
2.2L L4 Engine and
2.4L L4 Engine
2.0L L4 Supercharged
Engine
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine oil fill cap.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the
way back in when you are through.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
For Vehicles With the 2.2L or 2.4L
L4 Engine
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should
also have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
Look for two things:
• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting
GM Standard GM6094M. You should look for and
use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
You should look for this information on the oil container,
and use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
5-17
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
For Vehicles with the 2.0L L4
Supercharged Engine Only
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
Look for two things:
• GM4718M
Your vehicle’s engine requires a special oil meeting
GM Standard GM4718M, such as Mobil 1® or
equivalent. Oils meeting this standard may be
identified as synthetic. However, not all synthetic oils
will meet this GM standard. You should look for and
use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM4718M.
5-18
Notice: If you use oils that do not have the
GM4718M Standard designation, you can cause
engine damage not covered by your warranty.
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should
also have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
You should look for this on the oil container, and
use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM4718M and have the starburst
symbol on the front of the oil container.
Your vehicle’s engine is filled at the factory with a
synthetic oil which meets all requirements for your
vehicle.
Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintain
engine oil level, oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M
may not be available. You can add substitute oil
designated SAE 5W-30 with the starburst symbol at all
temperatures. Substitute oil not meeting GM Standard
GM4718M should not be used for an oil change.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM standards
are all you will need for good performance and engine
protection.
5-19
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage
at which an oil change will be indicated can vary
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, you
must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is necessary.
A CHANGE OIL SOON message in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) will come on. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-40. Change your oil as soon
as possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is
possible that, if you are driving under the best conditions,
the oil life system may not indicate that an oil change is
necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil and
filter must be changed at least once a year and at this
time the system must be reset. Your dealer has
GM-trained service people who will perform this work
using genuine GM parts and reset the system. It is also
important to check your oil regularly and keep it at the
proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
5-20
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Anytime
your oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate
when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs
where you change your oil prior to a CHANGE OIL SOON
message being turned on, reset the system.
After changing the engine oil, the system must be reset
as follows:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN, with the engine off.
2. Press the information and reset buttons on the DIC
at the same time to enter the personalization menu.
See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-43.
3. Press the information button to scroll through the
available personalization menu modes until the
DIC display shows OIL-LIFE RESET.
4. Press and hold the reset button until the DIC
display shows ACKNOWLEDGED. This will tell you
the system has been reset.
5. Turn the key to LOCK.
If the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes back on
when you start your vehicle, the engine oil life system
has not reset. Repeat the reset procedure.
What to Do with Used Oil
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in
the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking it
to a place that collects used oil. If you have a problem
properly disposing of your used oil, ask your dealer, a
service station, or a local recycling center for help.
When to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after
each 50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information. If
you are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter
at each engine oil change.
5-21
How to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
2.2L and 2.4L L4 Engines
To inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filter from the
vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose dust
and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new filter is
required.
2.0L L4 Supercharged Engine
There is a special procedure for inspecting and replacing
the filter. Because this procedure is difficult, you should
have it done at your dealer service department. Contact
your dealer for additional information, or the procedure
can be found in the service manual. To purchase a
service manual, see Service Publications Ordering
Information on page 7-14.
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned.
The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps
to stop flames if the engine backfires. If it is
not there and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
To inspect or replace the filter, remove the screws that
hold the cover on and lift off the cover. Be sure to
reinstall the cover tightly.
5-22
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get
into your engine, which will damage it. Always have
the air cleaner/filter in place when you are driving.
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
Manual Transaxle Fluid
It is not necessary to check the transaxle fluid level.
A transaxle fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss.
If a leak occurs, take your vehicle to the dealership
service department and have it repaired as soon
as possible.
It is not necessary to check the transaxle fluid level.
A transaxle fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss.
If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to the dealership
service department and have it repaired as soon as
possible. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 6-12 for the proper fluid to use.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
Additional Required Services on page 6-6, and be
sure to use the transaxle fluid listed in Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transaxle
fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by your warranty. Always
use the automatic transaxle fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Hydraulic Clutch
The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle is
self-adjusting. This system does not have its own
reservoir. It receives fluid from the brake master
cylinder reservoir.
See Brakes on page 5-38 for more information.
5-23
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed to
remain in your vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with
engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on
page 5-29.
5-24
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
•
•
•
•
•
Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at the first maintenance
service after each 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or
24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do
not need to add anything else.
{CAUTION:
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or additives
in your vehicle’s cooling system, you could damage
your vehicle. Use only the proper mixture of the
engine coolant listed in this manual for the cooling
system. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 6-12 for more information.
Checking Coolant
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and
other parts.
The coolant surge tank is located in the engine
compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
5-25
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for more information on location.
{CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the
COLD FILL line.
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the coolant surge tank, but only
when the engine is cool. If the coolant surge tank is
empty, a special fill procedure is necessary. See Engine
Overheating on page 5-29 for instructions on “How to
Add Coolant to the Coolant Surge Tank.”
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight and fully seated.
5-26
Checking Intercooler System Coolant
(2.0L L4 Supercharged Engine Only)
{CAUTION:
Turning the fill neck pressure cap when the
engine and intercooler are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn
you badly. Never turn the fill neck pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
intercooler are hot.
Park your vehicle on a level surface and turn off the
engine. When the engine is cold, the coolant level
should be visible within the horizontal tube section of
the fill neck. When the engine is warm, the coolant level
could be as high as the FULL HOT line on the fill
neck, or a little higher.
The intercooler system fill neck is located in the front of
the engine compartment, near the center of the
vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for more information on location.
5-27
Adding Coolant to the Intercooler System
Fill Neck
If coolant is not visible in the fill neck, add a 50/50
mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL®
coolant at the fill neck, but be sure that the cooling
system, including the fill neck pressure cap, is cool
before you do so.
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly.
They are under pressure, and if you turn the
intercooler system pressure cap — even a
little — they can come out at high speed. Never
turn the cap when the intercooler system,
including the intercooler system pressure cap,
is hot. Wait for the intercooler system and
intercooler system pressure cap to cool if
you ever have to turn the pressure cap.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your intercooler
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some
other liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the
proper coolant mixture will. With plain water or
the wrong mixture, your engine could get too
hot. Your engine could catch fire and you or
others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, intercooler, and other parts. Use the
recommended coolant and the proper coolant
mixture.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
5-28
1. You can remove the fill neck pressure cap when
the intercooler system, including the upper
intercooler hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure
cap slowly counterclockwise about one-quarter of
a turn. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. This
will allow any remaining pressure to be vented.
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.
The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully
installed on the coolant surge tank. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more
information on location.
3. Add the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture to the
fill neck, until there is coolant visible in the horizontal
tube section of the fill neck.
4. With the fill neck pressure cap off, start the engine
and let it run for at least 30 seconds. Watch out for
the engine cooling fan. Turn the engine off. By this
time, the coolant level inside the fill neck may be
lower. If the level drops so that coolant is no longer
visible in the horizontal tube section of the fill neck,
add more of the DEX-COOL® coolant mixture to the
fill neck until the level is again visible in the horizontal
tube section.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
Engine Overheating
You will find an engine coolant temperature warning
light on your vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine
Coolant Temperature Warning Light on page 3-32 for
more information.
5. Replace the intercooler system pressure cap.
Be sure the pressure cap is hand-tight and fully
seated.
If the coolant is not at the proper level when the
system cools down again, see your dealer.
5-29
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay
away from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it. Just turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
5-30
If No Steam Is Coming From
Your Engine
An engine coolant temperature warning can indicate a
serious problem. See Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light on page 3-32.
If you get an engine coolant temperature warning, but
see or hear no steam, the problem may not be too
serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot
when you:
•
•
•
•
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer.
If you get the engine coolant temperature warning with
no sign of steam, try this for a minute or so:
1. If you have an air conditioner and it is on, turn it off.
2. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
engine idle.
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
3. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the windows as necessary.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning does not come back on, you can drive
normally.
If the warning continues and you have not stopped, pull
over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle the engine
for three minutes while you are parked. If you still
have the warning, turn off the engine and get everyone
out of the vehicle until it cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
2.2L L4 Engine shown, 2.4L L4 Engine similar
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fan
B. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap
5-31
{CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling, do
not do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface.
2.0L L4 Supercharged Engine
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
B. Intercooler System Pressure Cap
C. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap
5-32
The coolant level should be at the COLD FILL line. If it
is not, you may have a leak at the pressure cap or
in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water
pump, or somewhere in the cooling system.
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If
you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the
vehicle.
If your vehicle is equipped with the 2.0L L4 Supercharged
engine and there seems to be no leak, with the engine
on, check to see if the electric engine cooling fans are
running. If the engine is overheating, the fans should be
running. If they are not, your vehicle needs service.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
If your vehicle is equipped with the 2.2L or 2.4L L4
engine and there seems to be no leak, with the engine
on, check to see if the electric engine cooling fan is
running. If the engine is overheating, the fan should be
running. If it is not, your vehicle needs service.
5-33
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause your engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see if
coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank. If coolant is
visible but the coolant level is not at the COLD FILL
line, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant surge tank, but
be sure the cooling system, including the coolant surge
tank pressure cap, is cool before you do it. See
Engine Coolant on page 5-24 for more information.
5-34
2.2L and 2.4L L4 Engines
If no coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank, add
coolant as follows:
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the coolant
surge tank pressure cap — even a little — they
can come out at high speed. Never turn the
cap when the cooling system, including the
coolant surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait
for the cooling system and coolant surge tank
pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn
the pressure cap.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
1. You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure
cap when the cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator
hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise about two or two and one-half
turns. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. This
will allow any pressure still left to be vented out
the discharge hose.
2. Then keep turning the
pressure cap slowly,
and remove it.
5-35
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower than
the COLD FILL line, add more of the proper mixture
to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches
the COLD FILL line.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
See your dealer, if necessary.
2.0L L4 Supercharged Engine
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture,
to the COLD FILL line on the tank. Wait about
five minutes, then check to see if the level is below
the COLD FILL line. If the level is below the line,
add additional coolant to bring the level up to
the line. Repeat this procedure until the level
remains constant at the COLD FILL line for at least
five minutes.
5-36
If no coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank, you will
need to either see your dealer or refer to the Dealer
Service Manual for a special coolant service fill procedure
to ensure enough coolant is added. To purchase a
service manual, see Service Publications Ordering
Information on page 7-14.
Windshield Washer Fluid
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the
What to Use
manufacturer’s instructions for adding water.
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be
operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid that
has sufficient protection against freezing.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Adding Washer Fluid
• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters full
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of
the washer system. Also, water does not clean as
well as washer fluid.
when it is very cold. This allows for expansion if
freezing occurs, which could damage the tank if
it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your washer
system and paint.
5-37
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master cylinder
and, on manual transaxle
vehicles, the hydraulic
clutch use the same
reservoir. The reservoir is
filled with DOT-3 brake
fluid. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for the location
of the reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake
fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid
level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is
leaking out of the brake and/or clutch hydraulic system.
If it is, you should have your brake and/or clutch system
fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later your brakes
and/or clutch will not work well, or will not work at all.
5-38
So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake/clutch fluid.
Adding fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluid when
your brake linings are worn, then you will have too much
fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add or
remove fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on
the brake/clutch hydraulic system.
{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
and/or clutch hydraulic system.
When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your brake
warning light will come on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-29.
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
only. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 6-12.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help
keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your
brake/clutch system, your brakes/clutch may
not work well, or they may not even work at
all. This could cause a crash. Always use the
proper brake fluid.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake/
clutch system parts. For example, just a few
drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in
your brake/clutch hydraulic system can damage
brake/clutch system parts so badly that they will
have to be replaced. Do not let someone put in
the wrong kind of fluid.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged.
Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle.
If you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing
Your Vehicle on page 5-92.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has front disc brakes and may have rear
drum brakes or rear disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a
high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are
worn and new pads are needed. The sound may come
and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving,
except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly.
{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
your brakes will not work well. That could lead
to an accident. When you hear the brake wear
warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
5-39
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
If your vehicle has rear drum brakes, they do not have
wear indicators, but if you ever hear a rear brake rubbing
noise, have the rear brake linings inspected immediately.
Also, the rear brake drums should be removed and
inspected each time the tires are removed for rotation or
changing. When you have the front brake pads replaced,
have the rear brakes inspected, too.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
5-40
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a moderate brake stop, your disc
brakes adjust for wear. If you rarely make a moderate or
heavier stop, then your brakes might not adjust correctly.
If you drive in that way, then — very carefully — make a
few moderate brake stops about every 1,000 miles
(1 600 km), so your brakes will adjust properly.
If you have rear drum brakes and your brake pedal
goes down farther than normal, the rear drum brakes
may need adjustment. Adjust them by backing up
and firmly applying the brakes a few times.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together
if the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your
vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality
GM brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system — for example, when your brake linings wear
down and you need new ones put in — be sure you get
new approved GM replacement parts. If you do not, your
brakes may no longer work properly. For example, if
someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your
vehicle, the balance between your front and rear brakes
can change — for the worse. The braking performance
you have come to expect can change in many other ways
if someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts.
Battery
Vehicle Storage
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
time for a new battery, get one that has the replacement
number shown on the original battery’s label. We
recommend an ACDelco® replacement battery.
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative (−) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
Your vehicle’s battery is located in the trunk. You do not
need to access the battery to jump start your vehicle.
See Jump Starting on page 5-42.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and
gas that can explode. You can be badly hurt
if you are not careful. See Jump Starting on
page 5-42 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
5-41
Jump Starting
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may want to
use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start
your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do
it safely.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode
or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
5-42
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set the
parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the
jump start procedure. Put an automatic transaxle in
PARK (P) or a manual transaxle in NEUTRAL before
setting the parking brake.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlet. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that are not needed.
This will avoid sparks and help save both
batteries. And it could save the radio!
The remote negative (−)
ground terminal, marked
GND (−), is located
behind the engine coolant
surge tank.
4. Open the hood on the other vehicle and locate the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
that vehicle.
You will not see the battery of your vehicle under
the hood. It is located in the trunk. You will not need
to access your battery for jump starting. Your
vehicle has a remote positive (+) and a remote
negative (−) jump starting terminal.
The remote positive
terminal is located under a
red tethered cap on the
engine compartment
fuse block. Lift the cap to
access the terminal.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for more information on the location of the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminals on your
vehicle.
{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
5-43
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you don’t, explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
5-44
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go
to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal
if the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal location on the vehicle with the dead
battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the next
step. The other end of the negative (−) cable does
not go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable to
the negative (−) terminal location on the vehicle
with the dead battery. Your vehicle has a remote
negative (−) terminal marked GND (−).
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
5-45
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the positive (+) terminal cover to its original
position.
Headlamp Aiming
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal (GND)
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-46
The vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming
system. The aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment
However, If the vehicle is damaged in an accident, the
headlamp aim may be affected and adjustment may
be necessary.
If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams at you, this
may also mean the vertical aim needs to be adjusted.
It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to your
dealer for service if the headlamps need to be re-aimed.
It is possible however, to re-aim the headlamps as
described in the following procedure.
The vehicle should be properly prepared as follows:
• The vehicle should be placed so the headlamps are
25 ft. (7.6 m) from a light colored wall or other flat
surface.
• The vehicle must have all four tires on a perfectly
level surface which is level all the way to the wall
or other flat surface.
• The vehicle should be placed so it is perpendicular
to the wall or other flat surface.
• The vehicle should not have any snow, ice or mud
on it.
• The vehicle should be fully assembled and all other
work stopped while headlamp aiming is being done.
• The vehicle should be normally loaded with a
full tank of fuel and one person or 160 lbs (75 kg) on
the driver’s seat.
• Tires should be properly inflated.
The adjustment screw can be turned with a 6 mm
socket wrench.
Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle’s low-beam
headlamps. The high-beam headlamps will be correctly
aimed if the low-beam headlamps are aimed properly.
The vertical headlamp aiming screws are located under
the hood near the headlamps.
5-47
To adjust the vertical aim on the headlamps, do the
following:
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-11
for more information.
2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of the low-beam
headlamp.
3. Measure the distance from the ground to the aim
dot on the low-beam headlamp. Record the
distance.
4. At the wall or other flat surface, measure from the
ground upward (A) to the recorded distance from
Step 3 and mark it.
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) on the wall or flat
surface the width of the vehicle at the height of the
mark in Step 4.
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam
cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up which may cause
damage to the headlamp.
6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a
piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the
headlamp not being adjusted. Do not place directly
on the headlamp. This allows only the beam of
light from the headlamp being adjusted to be seen
on the flat surface.
5-48
7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws, which
are under the hood near each headlamp assembly.
The adjustment screw can be turned with a
6 mm male hex.
Bulb Replacement
8. Turn the vertical aiming screw until the headlamp
beam is aimed to the horizontal tape line. Turn it
clockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lower the
angle of the beam.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer.
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
Replacement Bulbs on page 5-55.
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside
and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.
You or others could be injured. Be sure to read
and follow the instructions on the bulb
package.
9. Make sure that the light from the headlamp is
positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal tape
line. The lamp on the left (A) shows the correct
headlamp aim. The lamp on the right (B) shows the
incorrect headlamp aim.
10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the opposite
headlamp.
5-49
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,
Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-11
for more information.
A. Front Turn Signal/Parking Lamp
B. Sidemarker
C. Headlamp
2. Remove the two hex bolts from the headlamp
assembly.
3. Remove the two plastic fasteners from the fascia.
4. Pull the front fascia back.
You may need someone else to assist you with
Steps 3 and 4.
5-50
5. Pull the headlamp assembly up on an angle and
towards the radiator to remove it.
6. Disconnect the bulb base from the wiring harness
by lifting the plastic locking tab.
7. To replace a headlamp bulb, do the following:
7.1. Disconnect the wiring harness from the
bulb socket.
7.2. Remove the black retainer by turning it
counterclockwise.
8. Turn the bulb socket for the headlamp, front turn
signal, or parking lamp counterclockwise. For the
sidemarker bulb, you will need to us a tool to assist
in turning the bulb socket.
9. Pull the old bulb out of the socket.
10. Install a new bulb.
11. Reinstall the bulb assembly by reversing
Steps 1 through 8.
When reinstalling the headlamp assembly, first
make sure that the wiring harness is in its original
position. If not, the headlamp assembly will not
fit correctly.
You will also need to line up the two tabs on the
bottom of the assembly that fit into two slots in the
headlamp assembly bracket.
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL)
To replace a CHMSL bulb, do the following:
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-10 for more
information.
2. Locate the CHMSL bulb assembly in the trunk lid.
3. Depress the plastic tabs to release the bulb
assembly.
5-51
Taillamps and Turn Signal
Lamps (Coupe)
To replace this bulb, do the following:
4. Pull the bulb assembly down to access the bulbs.
5. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.
6. Install a new bulb.
7. Align the tabs in the bulb assembly with the
assembly in the trunk lid. Push the bulb assembly
back into place until it snaps in. You may need
to use a tool to guide the tabs into the assembly.
5-52
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-10 for more
information.
2. Remove the fastener which holds down the
trunk trim.
3. Disconnect the wiring harness by lifting up on the
tab to release and pull it straight out.
4. Remove the taillamp bulb socket from the assembly
by turning it counterclockwise.
5. Pull the old bulb out of the socket.
6. Install a new bulb.
7. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 to reinstall the taillamp
assembly.
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps (Sedan)
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-10 for more
information.
2. Remove the fastener which holds down the trunk
trim. Once you have removed the trim, there will
be one more fastener to remove.
3. Remove the outer two screws from the taillamp
assembly.
4. Disconnect the wiring harness by lifting up on the
tab to release and pull it straight out.
5. Remove the taillamp from the quarter panel.
A. Sidemarker
B. Stoplamp/Turn Signal/Taillamp
C. Back-up
6. Locate the bulb you need to change
7. Remove the taillamp bulb socket from the assembly
by turning it counterclockwise.
8. Pull the old bulb out of the socket.
9. Install a new bulb.
10. Reverse Steps 1 through 6 to reinstall the taillamp
assembly.
5-53
Back-Up Lamps (Coupe)
To replace a back-up lamp bulb, do the following:
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-10 for more
information.
2. Locate the back-up lamp bulb assembly in the
trunk lid.
3. Remove the bulb socket by turning it
counterclockwise.
On vehicles that have a back-up lamp cover, first
remove it by depressing the tab at the top.
4. Pull out the old bulb.
5. Install a new bulb.
6. Reinstall the bulb socket by aligning the tabs and
turning it clockwise to secure.
5-54
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamps
Bulb Number
Back-Up Lamps
921
Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL)
912
Front Parking/Turn Signal Lamps
3157KX
Halogen Headlamps,
High/Low-Beam
9007 LL
License Plate Lamp and
Sidemarker
Stoplamp, Taillamp and Turn
Signal Lamps
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For proper type and length,
see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 6-14. Here is how to remove the wiper blades:
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the
windshield.
194
3057KX
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
for more information on wiper blade inspection.
2. Push the release lever and slide the wiper assembly
toward the driver’s side of the vehicle.
3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2.
5-55
Tires
CAUTION:
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additional
information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet
included with your vehicle.
• Poorly maintained and improperly used
tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-31.
CAUTION:
5-56
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
•
{CAUTION:
(Continued)
(Continued)
•
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-63 for
inflation pressure adjustment for high speed
driving.
Low-Profile Performance Tire
If your vehicle has 215/45R18 size tires, they are
classified as low-profile performance tires. These tires
are designed for very responsive driving on wet or
dry pavement. You may also notice more road noise
with low-profile performance tires and that they tend to
wear faster.
Notice: If your vehicle has low-profile tires, they
are more susceptible to damage from road hazards
or curb impact than standard profile tires. Tire
and/or wheel assembly damage can occur when
coming into contact with road hazards like,
potholes, or sharp edged objects, or when sliding
into a curb. Your GM warranty does not cover
this type of damage. Keep tires set to the correct
inflation pressure and, when possible avoid contact
with curbs, potholes, and other road hazards.
For cold weather driving conditions, you may prefer to
get tires designed for snow or ice. See your dealer
for details regarding winter tire availability and proper
tire selection. Also, see Buying New Tires on page 5-66.
If you choose to use winter tires:
• Use tires of the same brand and tread type on all
four wheel positions.
• Use only radial ply tires of the same size, load range,
and speed rating as your original equipment tires.
Winter tires with the same speed rating as your original
equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W
and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose winter tires with
a lower speed rating, never exceed the tire’s maximum
speed capability.
5-57
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical passenger
vehicle tire and a compact spare tire sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of letters
and numbers used to define a particular tire’s width,
height, aspect ratio, construction type and service
description. See the “Tire Size” illustration later in this
section for more detail.
5-58
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s
TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines. If your vehicle has 205/55R16 size tires, they
meet the GM TPC Spec rating, but the TPC Spec code
has not been molded onto the tire’s sidewall.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT (Department of Transportation)
code is the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The TIN
shows the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and
date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto
both sides of the tire, although only one side may have
the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on
three performance factors: treadwear, traction and
temperature resistance. For more information see
Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-68.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification Number
(TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code,
tire size, and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is
molded onto both sides of the tire, although only one side
may have the date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or compact
spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa).
For more information on tire pressure and inflation
see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-63.
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare tire or
temporary use tire has a tread life of approximately
3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should not be driven at
speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h). The compact spare tire
is for emergency use when a regular road tire has lost air
and gone flat. If your vehicle has a compact spare tire,
see Compact Spare Tire on page 5-88 and If a Tire Goes
Flat on page 5-73.
(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and numbers
define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type and service description. The letter T as the
first character in the tire size means the tire is for
temporary use only.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
5-59
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a typical
passenger vehicle tire size.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The
letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D means
diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter B means
belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as the
first character in the tire size means a passenger vehicle
tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire and Rim
Association. A tire size without the letter P as the first
character is certified to European standards.
(F) Service Description: These characters represent
the load range and speed rating of the tire. The load
index represents the load carry capacity a tire is certified
to carry. The load index can range from 1 to 279.
The speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified
to carry a load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure
is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascal (kPa).
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates
the tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if
the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as shown in item C of the
illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is
60 percent as high as it is wide.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight
of optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air
conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to
its width.
5-60
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made
from steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are
laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-63.
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment including
the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation (DOT) motor vehicle
safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire
Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator
which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production
plant, brand, and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, see Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-31.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front
axle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty
trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity
of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb
weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity weight,
and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a
vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg).
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31.
5-61
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces
outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire
that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or
bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding
that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on
the other sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger
cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-63 and Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-31.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the road
surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of a tire
when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-66.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards):
A tire information system that provides consumers
with ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature, and
treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers
using government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on page 5-68.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords
that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg) plus
the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-31.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,
occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a
tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire
can operate.
5-62
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight and
the original equipment tire size and recommended
inflation pressure. See “Tire and Loading Information
Label” under Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate
effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is not.
If your tires do not have enough air (under-inflation),
you can get the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Premature or irregular wear
For additional information regarding how much weight
your vehicle can carry, and an example of the tire
and loading information label, see Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-31. How you load your vehicle affects
vehicle handling and ride comfort, never load your
vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry.
Poor handling
When to Check
Reduced fuel economy
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not forget
to check the compact spare tire, it should be at
60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information regarding
the compact spare tire, see Compact Spare Tire
on page 5-88.
Too much flexing
Too much heat
Tire overloading
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation), you
can get the following:
•
•
•
•
A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the
vehicle’s center pillar, below the driver’s door latch.
This label lists your vehicle’s original equipment
tires and their recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
The recommended cold tire inflation pressure, shown
on the label, is the minimum amount of air pressure
needed to support your vehicle’s maximum load carrying
capacity.
Unusual wear
Poor handling
Rough ride
Needless damage from road hazards
5-63
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly
inflated even when they are under-inflated. Check the
tire’s inflation pressure when the tires are cold. Cold
means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three
hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press
the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches
the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading
Information label, no further adjustment is necessary.
If the inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the
metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and
moisture.
5-64
High Speed Operation
{CAUTION:
Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h) or
higher, puts an additional strain on tires.
Sustained high-speed driving causes
excessive heat build up and can cause sudden
tire failure. You could have a crash and you or
others could be killed. Some high-speed rated
tires require inflation pressure adjustment for
high speed operation. When speed limits and
road conditions are such that a vehicle can be
driven at high speeds, make sure the tires are
rated for high speed operation, in excellent
condition, and set to the correct cold tire
inflation pressure for the vehicle load.
If your vehicle has 215/45R18 size tires, set the cold tire
inflation pressure to 35 psi (241 kPa) for the front and
rear tires, when operating your vehicle under high-speed
conditions. When you end high-speed driving return
the tires to the cold inflation pressure shown on the tire
and loading information label.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Do not include the compact spare tire in your tire
rotation.
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as
soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also
check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time
for New Tires on page 5-66 and Wheel Replacement
on page 5-70 for more information.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation
is the most important. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened.
See “Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-107.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all
the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire on
page 5-74.
When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
5-65
When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
5-66
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for your
vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on your
vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification
(TPC spec) system rating. If you need replacement tires,
GM strongly recommends that you get tires with the same
TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle will continue
to have tires that are designed to give the same
performance and vehicle safety, during normal use,
as the original tires.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall
performance of your vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire
pressure monitoring performance. GM’s TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire’s sidewall by the tire
manufacturer. If the tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC spec number will be followed by an
MS for mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on
page 5-58 for additional information.
Tire size 205/55R16 91 H, used on some vehicles,
meets the General Motors Tire Performance Criteria
Specification (TPC Spec) rating, but the TPC Spec code
has not been molded onto the tire’s sidewall. If your
vehicle has these tires, and you need to replace them,
you can still get these TPC Spec rated tires by asking
your GM dealer.
Your GM dealer can order these tires by part number.
This way, your vehicle will continue to give the
proper endurance, handling, traction, and ride as the
original tires.
{CAUTION:
Winter tires with the same speed rating as your original
equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, Y,
and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose winter tires with
a lower speed rating, never exceed the tire’s maximum
speed capability.
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes,
brands, or types (radial and bias-belted tires),
the vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes, brands, or types may also cause
damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the
correct size, brand, and type of tires on all
wheels. It is all right to drive with your
compact spare temporarily, as it was
developed for use on your vehicle. See
Compact Spare Tire on page 5-88.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those that do
not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the
same size, load range, speed rating, and construction
type (radial and bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s
original tires.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on the
Tire and Loading Information Label. This label is attached
to the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-31, for more information about the Tire
and Loading Information Label and its location on your
vehicle.
5-67
Different Size Tires and Wheels
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability, and
resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle
has electronic systems such as, anti-lock brakes,
traction control, and electronic stability control, the
performance of these systems can be affected.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
{CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle
may not provide an acceptable level of
performance and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels are selected.
You may increase the chance that you will
crash and suffer serious injury. Only use
GM specific wheel and tire systems developed
for your vehicle, and have them properly
installed by a GM certified technician.
See Buying New Tires on page 5-66 and Accessories
and Modifications on page 5-3 for additional information.
5-68
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system developed
by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA), which grades tires by
treadwear, traction, and temperature performance.
This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
(UTQG) system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
Treadwear
Temperature – A, B, C
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half
(1.5) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm due to variations in
driving habits, service practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does
not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
5-69
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
Wheel Replacement
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and
balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest
tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to
wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary
on a regular basis. However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other, the
alignment may need to be checked. If you notice your
vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your
tires and wheels may need to be rebalanced. See your
dealer for proper diagnosis.
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly
rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose,
the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be
replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel
bolts, or wheel nuts, replace them only with new
GM original equipment parts. This way, you will be
sure to have the right wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel
nuts for your vehicle.
5-70
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts, and wheel nuts for replacement.
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has been
used or how far it has been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-74 for more
information.
5-71
Tire Chains
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has 205/55R16, P205/55R16,
P205/50R17 or 215/45R18 size tires, do not use
tire chains. There is not enough clearance.
Tire chains used on a vehicle without the
proper amount of clearance can cause damage
to the brakes, suspension, or other vehicle
parts. The area damaged by the tire chains
could cause you to lose control of your vehicle
and you or others may be injured in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination, and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do
not spin your vehicle’s wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit,
install them on the front tires.
5-72
Notice: If your vehicle has a tire size other than
205/55R16, P205/55R16, P205/50R17 or 215/45R18
size tires, use tire chains only where legal and only
when you must. Use only SAE Class S-type chains
that are the proper size for your tires. Install them on
the front tires and tighten them as tightly as possible
with the ends securely fastened. Drive slowly and
follow the chain manufacturer’s instructions. If you
can hear the chains contacting your vehicle, stop and
retighten them. If the contact continues, slow down
until it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels
with chains on will damage your vehicle.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here
are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that pulls
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly. Steer
to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to a stop
well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would use
in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go.
It may be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer.
Gently brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-73
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your
hazard warning flashers.
(Continued)
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in
the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put an automatic transaxle shift lever in
PARK (P), or shift a manual transaxle to
FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).
CAUTION:
5-74
CAUTION:
(Continued)
To be even more certain the vehicle will not
move, you should put blocks at the front
andrear of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire on the
other side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.
When you have a flat tire, use the following example as a
guide to assist you in the placement of wheel blocks.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The equipment you will need is located in the trunk.
Base Models
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-10 for more
information.
The following information will tell you how to use the
jack and change a tire.
2. Lift the trunk liner to access the spare tire
and tools.
5-75
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
5-76
Cover
Retainer
Spare Tire
Wing Nut
Jack and Wheel Wrench
Bolt
3. Remove the retainer (B) that holds down the spare
tire. See Compact Spare Tire on page 5-88
4. Remove the spare tire (C) by placing your hands at
the four and eight o’clock positions. Gently pull it up
and out of the trunk.
Uplevel Models
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-10 for more
information.
5. Remove the wing nut (D) that holds the jack and
remove the jack and wheel wrench (E).
2. Lift the trunk liner to access the spare tire
and tools.
5-77
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Retainer
Jack and Wheel Wrench
Spare Tire
Foam Support
Bolt
3. Remove the retainer (A) that holds down the jack,
wheel wrench (B) and spare tire (C).
4. Remove the spare tire by placing your hands at the
four and eight o’clock positions. Gently pull it up
and out of the trunk.
5-78
The tools you will be using include the jack (A) and
wheel wrench (B).
You will need to turn the plastic wheel nut
counterclockwise to loosen the wheel wrench from
the jack.
5-79
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
Press the button and then pull on the end of the wheel
wrench to extend the handle.
1. If your vehicle has plastic wheel covers, use
the wheel wrench to loosen the plastic wheel
nut caps.
Once you have loosened the plastic wheel nut caps
with the wheel wrench, you can finish loosening
them with your fingers. The plastic nut caps do not
come off.
5-80
2. Using the flat end of the wheel wrench, pry along
the edge of the wheel cover until it comes off.
If your vehicle has aluminum wheels, first remove
the center cap with your finger or the wheel wrench.
3. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts.
Do not remove them yet.
Notice: Make sure that the jack lift head is in the
correct position or you may damage your vehicle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
5. Raise the jack head until it fits firmly in the vehicle’s
frame, where the notch is located, nearest the
flat tire.
6. Put the compact spare tire near the flat tire.
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get
under a vehicle when it is supported only by
a jack.
{CAUTION:
4. Position the jack lift head at the jack location nearest
the flat tire. The front location is about 8 inches
(20 cm) rearward from the front wheel opening.
The rear location is about 4 inches (10 cm) forward
of the rear wheel opening.
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
5-81
7. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the compact
spare tire to fit under the vehicle.
8. Remove all of the
wheel nuts.
5-82
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
the places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get
all the rust or dirt off.
9. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.
If you do, the nuts might come loose. Your
wheel could fall off, causing a serious
accident.
10. Place the compact spare tire on the wheel-mounting
surface.
11. Reinstall the wheel nuts with the rounded end of
the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by
hand until the wheel is held against the hub.
12. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
5-83
{CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose
and even come off. This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel
nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to
get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities
and Specifications on page 5-107 for wheel nut
torque specification.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-107 for the wheel nut
torque specification.
4-Wheel Nuts
5-Wheel Nuts
13. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a crisscross
sequence, as shown.
5-84
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your compact
spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on the compact
spare, you could damage the cover or the spare.
Do not try to put a wheel cover on your compact spare
tire. It will not fit. Store the wheel cover in the trunk
until you have the flat tire repaired or replaced.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
all these in the proper place.
5-85
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Base Model
5-86
Cover
Retainer
Jack and Wheel Wrench
Stow Bolt Extension
Spare Tire
Bolt
Uplevel Model
A. Cover
B. Retainer
C. Jack and Wheel Wrench
D. Stow Bolt Extension
E. Spare Tire
F. Foam Support
G. Bolt
To store a flat or spare tire and tools, do the following:
1. Remove the stow bolt extension rod and sleeve
from the jack.
2. Screw the stow bolt extension rod and the sleeve
into the existing spare tire hold-down bolt.
3. Place the flat tire face down into the spare tire hub.
Avoid scraping the aluminum wheel, if equipped, on
the hold-down bolt.
4. Re-attach the wheel wrench to the jack.
5. Place the jack into the center of the flat tire, being
careful not to scratch the inside of the wheel.
6. Place the smaller jack hold-down nut in a safe
place for use when you put the compact spare
tire back into the trunk.
7. Remove the plastic sleeve from the stow bolt
extension rod. Secure the jack and road wheel
using the larger plastic retainer.
The compact spare tire is for temporary use only.
Replace the compact spare with a full-size tire as soon
as possible.
5-87
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when
the vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle, stop
as soon as possible and make sure the spare tire
is correctly inflated. The compact spare is made to
perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h)
for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can
finish your trip and have the full-size tire repaired or
replaced at your convenience. Of course, it is best
to replace the spare with a full-size tire as soon as
possible. The spare tire will last longer and be in good
shape in case it is needed again.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
with guide rails. The compact spare can get
caught on the rails. That can damage the tire and
wheel, and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
5-88
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.
And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the
spare tire and its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact spare.
Using them can damage your vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Do not use tire chains on
your compact spare.
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and dirt
can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt can damage
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from
your upholstery. It is important to keep your upholstery
from becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should
be removed as quickly as possible. Your vehicle’s interior
may experience extremes of heat that could cause stains
to set rapidly.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to your home furnishings may also
transfer color to your vehicle’s interior.
Your GM dealer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you can
also obtain a product from your GM dealer to remove
odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleaners
or techniques:
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on your
vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety instructions
on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’s interior,
maintain adequate ventilation by opening your vehicle’s
doors and windows.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
remove a soil from any interior surface.
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage to
your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
with a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure
can damage your interior and does not improve the
effectiveness of soil removal.
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundry
detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers.
Using too much soap will leave a residue that
leaves streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners,
about 20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a
good guide.
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
cleaning.
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result from
the use of many organic solvents such as naptha,
alcohol, etc.
5-89
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used
on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For soils, always
try to remove them first with plain water or club soda.
Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as
possible using one of the following techniques:
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel
until no more can be removed.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and
then vacuum.
To clean, use the following instructions:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
5-90
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner
or spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test
a small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression that a ring
formation may result, clean the entire surface.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to remove
dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a soft
cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used.
Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
Never use steam to clean leather. Never use spot lifters
or spot removers on leather. Many commercial leather
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and
protect leather may permanently change the appearance
and feel of your leather and are not recommended.
Do not use silicone or wax-based products, or those
containing organic solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior
because they can alter the appearance by increasing the
gloss in a non-uniform manner. Never use shoe polish on
your leather.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to remove
dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a clean
soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be
used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters
or removers on plastic surfaces. Many commercial
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and
protect soft plastic surfaces may permanently change
the appearance and feel of your interior and are not
recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
your vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on your
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make
it difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
5-91
Washing Your Vehicle
Finish Care
The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty, depth of
color, gloss retention, and durability.
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle
by hand may be necessary to remove residue from
the paint finish. GM-approved cleaning products can
be obtained from your dealer. See Vehicle Care/
Appearance Materials on page 5-95.
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep it
clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.
Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. GM-approved
cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer.
See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-95.
Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum
based, or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning
agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed
to dry on the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish
with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to
avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
the vehicle.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on
page 5-92.
5-92
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
The vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish.
The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather,
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. To help keep the paint finish looking new, keep
the vehicle in a garage or covered whenever possible.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap, or other material may be on the blade
or windshield.
Your vehicle may be equipped with either aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a glass cleaning
liquid or powder and water solution. The windshield is
clean if beads do not form when it is rinsed with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by
wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels, you could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Use only GM-approved cleaners on
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because you could damage the surface. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
5-93
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Finish Damage
Tires
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
5-94
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your GM dealer. Larger areas of
finish damage can be corrected in your GM dealer’s body
and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the
paint surface.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Chrome Cleaner and
Polish
White Sidewall Tire
Cleaner
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
Chrome and Wire Wheel
Cleaner
Finish Enhancer
Usage
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Removes tar, road oil and
asphalt.
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Cleans vinyl.
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
wipe off.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
5-95
Description
Swirl Remover Polish
Cleaner Wax
Foaming Tire Shine
Low Gloss
Wash Wax Concentrate
Spot Lifter
Odor Eliminator
5-96
Usage
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches and other light
surface contamination.
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Cleans, shines and
protects in one easy step,
no wiping necessary.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Quickly and easily
removes spots and stains
from carpets, vinyl and
cloth upholstery.
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
Electrical System
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code.
This code will help you identify your vehicle’s engine,
specifications, and replacement parts.
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Service Parts Identification Label
You will find this label in the trunk, on the driver side, near
the spare tire cover. It is very helpful if you ever need to
order parts. On this label, you will find the following:
•
•
•
•
VIN
Model designation
Paint information
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer first.
Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as they
should.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-66.
Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
5-97
Headlamp Wiring
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The headlamp wiring is protected by fuses. Should your
headlamps fail to function, have your headlamp
system checked right away.
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the
chance of damage caused by electrical problems.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow or ice, the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
If the overload is caused by some electrical problem,
have it fixed.
Power Windows and Other
Power Options
Fuses in the fuse block protect the power windows.
When the current load is too heavy, the fuse opens
protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed.
5-98
If you ever have a problem on the road and do not have
a spare fuse, you can “borrow” one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle
that you can get along without — like the radio or
cigarette lighter — and use its fuse if it is the correct
amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
There are two fuse blocks in your vehicle: the floor
console fuse block and the engine compartment
fuse block.
Floor Console Fuse Block
The floor console fuse block is located on the
passenger’s side of the floor console under the
instrument panel. To access the fuse block, remove
the panel on the side of the console.
Fuses
1
2
3
4
5
Usage
Fuse Puller
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
5-99
Fuses
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
5-100
Usage
Amplifier
Cluster
Ignition Switch, PASS-Key® III+
Stoplamp
Heating, Ventilation, Air
Conditioning, PASS-Key® III+
Empty
Spare
Airbag
Spare
Windshield Wiper
Climate Control System, Cluster
Empty
Empty
Electric Power Steering, Steering
Wheel Control
Sunroof
Fuses
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
Relays
30
31
32
Usage
Spare
Empty
Audio System
Sensing and Diagnostic Module
(Airbag)
Engine Control Module,
Transmission Control Module
Door Locks
Interior Lights
Empty
Power Windows
Usage
Climate Control System
Empty
Retained Accessory Power
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
The engine compartment fuse block is located on the driver’s side of the vehicle. Lift off the cover to check the
fuses. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more information on location.
2.2L Engine (L61) and 2.4L Engine (LE5)
5-101
Fuses
SPARES
Usage
Spares
Fuses
Usage
EMISN
Emissions
Blank
Not Used
Blank
Not Used
Blank
Not Used
INJ
Injectors
RDFG
Rear Defogger
Blank
Not Used
COOL/ FAN2
Cooling Fan 2
ABS
Anti-lock Brake System
CRNK
COOL/ FAN 1
Starter
Engine Cooling Fan
BCM3
Body Control Module 3
BCM2
Body Control Module 2
FOG LP
HORN
Fog Lamps
Horn
RH HI BEAM
Passenger’s Side High Beam
LH HI BEAM
Driver’s Side High Beam
RH LO BEAM
Passenger’s Side Low Beam
LH LO BEAM
Driver’s Side Low Beam
Blank
FUEL PMP
5-102
PCM/ECM
Not Used
Fuel Pump
EPS
Powertrain Control Module/Engine
Control Module
Electric Power Steering
AIR PMP
Air Pump
PRK LPS
Park Lamps
WPR
IP IGN
A/C CLTCH
AIR SOL
ABS2
PRK/NEUT
ECM/TRANS
Windshield Wiper
Ignition
Air Conditioning Clutch
Air Solenoid
Anti-lock Brake System 2
Park, Neutral
Engine Control Module,
Transmission
Fuses
Usage
BCK UP
Back-Up Lamps
TRUNK/
OUTLET
Trunk, Accessory Power Outlet
Blank
Not Used
Blank
Not Used
S BAND/
ONSTAR
Blank
LTR
MIR (S)
®
Audio, OnStar
Not Used
Relays
Usage
RDFG
Rear Defogger
COOL/ FAN2
Cooling Fan 2
WPR2
Windshield Wiper 2
CRNK
Starter
COOL/ FAN1
Cooling Fan 1
FUEL PUMP
Fuel Pump
WPR1
Windshield Wiper 1
Cigarette Lighter
PWR/TRN
Powertrain
Mirrors
AIR PMP
Air Pump
HTD SEATS
Heated Seats
A/C CLTCH
Air Conditioning Clutch
CNSTR VENT
Canister Vent
AIR SOL
Air Solenoid
RUN/CRNK
Run, Crank
5-103
Cobalt SS 2.0L L4 Supercharged Engine
5-104
Fuses
SPARES
Usage
Spares
Fuses
Usage
EMISN
Emissions
Blank
Not Used
Blank
Not Used
Blank
Not Used
INJ
Injectors
RDFG
Rear Defogger
Blank
Not Used
COOL/ FAN2
Cooling Fan 2
ABS
Anti-lock Brake System
CRNK
COOL/ FAN 1
Starter
Engine Cooling Fan
BCM3
Body Control Module 3
BCM2
Body Control Module 2
FOG LP
HORN
Fog Lamps
Horn
RH LO BEAM
Passenger’s Side Low Beam
LH LO BEAM
Driver’s Side Low Beam
RH HI BEAM
Passenger’s Side High Beam
LH HI BEAM
Driver’s Side High Beam
Blank
FUEL PMP
PCM/ECM
Not Used
Fuel Pump
Powertrain Control Module/Engine
Control Module
EPS
Electric Power Steering
Blank
Not Used
PRK LPS
WPR
IP IGN
Park Lamps
Windshield Wiper
Ignition
A/C CLTCH
Air Conditioning Clutch
AFTRCOOL
Aftercooler
ABS2
PRK/NEUT
ECM/TRANS
Anti-lock Brake System
Park, Neutral
Engine Control Module,
Transmission
5-105
Fuses
Usage
BCK UP
Back-Up Lamps
TRUNK/
OUTLET
Trunk, Accessory Power Outlet
Blank
Not Used
Blank
Not Used
S BAND/
ONSTAR
Blank
LTR
MIR (S)
®
Audio, OnStar
Not Used
Cigarette Lighter
Mirrors
HTD SEATS
Heated Seats
CNSTR VENT
Canister Vent
5-106
Relays
Usage
RDFG
Rear Defogger
COOL/ FAN2
Cooling Fan 2
WPR2
Windshield Wiper 2
CRNK
Starter
COOL/ FAN1
Cooling Fan 1
FUEL PUMP
Fuel Pump
WPR1
Windshield Wiper 1
COOL
SER/PAR
Series/Parallel Cooling Fan
PWR/TRN
Powertrain
A/C CLTCH
Air Conditioning Clutch
AFTRCOOL
Aftercooler Pump
RUN/CRNK
Run, Crank
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. Please refer to Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12 for more information.
Application
Capacities
English
0.9 lb
Metric
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
0.41 kg
Cooling System
2.0L L4 Engine Supercharged
7.4 qt
7.0 L
2.2L L4 Engine
6.8 qt
6.5 L
2.4L L4 Engine
7.4 qt
7.0L
Intercooler System 2.0L Engine
2.0 qt
1.9 L
Engine Oil with Filter
2.2L L4 and 2.4L L4 Engines
5.0 qt
4.7 L
2.0L L4 Engine Supercharged
6.0 qt
5.7 L
Fuel Tank
13.0 gal
49.2 L
Transaxle, Automatic (Complete Drain and Refill)
7.0 qt
6.6 L
Transaxle, Manual (Complete Drain and Refill)
2.2L L4 and 2.4L L4 Engines
1.7 qt
1.6 L
2.0L L4 Engine Supercharged
1.6 qt
1.5 L
Wheel Nut Torque
100 lb ft
140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this
manual.
5-107
Engine Specifications
5-108
Engine
VIN Code
Transaxle
Spark Plug Gap
2.2L L4
F
Automatic
Manual
0.042 inch (1.06 mm)
2.0L L4
(Supercharged)
P
Manual
0.042 inch (1.06 mm)
2.4L L4
B
Manual
Automatic
0.042 inch (1.06 mm)
Section 6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2
Introduction ...................................................6-2
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2
Using the Maintenance Schedule ......................6-3
Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4
Additional Required Services ............................6-6
Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-7
Owner Checks and Services ............................6-8
At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-9
At Least Once a Month ...................................6-9
At Least Once a Year ...................................6-10
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-12
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..........6-14
Maintenance Record .....................................6-15
6-1
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are
necessary to keep your vehicle in good working
condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance may not be covered by
warranty.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.
6-2
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect
the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or
the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions
from your vehicle. To help protect our environment, and
to keep your vehicle in good condition, be sure to
maintain your vehicle properly.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we do not know
exactly how you will drive it. You may drive very
short distances only a few times a week. Or you may
drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty
weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.
Or you may drive it to work, to do errands, or in many
other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your GM Goodwrench® dealer.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
Required Services on page 6-6 and Maintenance
Footnotes on page 6-7 for further information.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you
can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
see your GM Goodwrench® dealer to have a
qualified technician do the work.
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the tire and
loading information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-31.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 5-5.
Some maintenance services can be complex.
So, unless you are technically qualified and have
the necessary equipment, you should have your
GM Goodwrench® dealer do these jobs.
When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer for your
service needs, you will know that GM-trained and
supported service technicians will perform the work
using genuine GM parts.
6-3
If you want to purchase service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-14.
Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 tells you what
should be checked, when to check it, and what you can
easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-12 and Normal Maintenance Replacement
Parts on page 6-14. When your vehicle is serviced,
make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced
and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone
else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
genuine GM parts.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE OIL SOON message in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) comes on, it means that service
is required for your vehicle. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-40. Have your vehicle serviced as
soon as possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km).
It is possible that, if you are driving under the best
conditions, the engine oil life system may not indicate that
vehicle service is necessary for over a year. However,
your engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a
year and at this time the system must be reset. Your
GM Goodwrench® dealer has GM-trained service
technicians who will perform this work using genuine
GM parts and reset the system.
6-4
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally, you
must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles (5 000 km)
since your last service. Remember to reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life
System on page 5-20 for information on the Engine Oil
Life System and resetting the system.
When the CHANGE OIL SOON message appears,
certain services, checks, and inspections are required.
Required services are described in the following for
“Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally,
it is recommended that your first service be
Maintenance I, your second service be Maintenance II,
and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II
may be required more often.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the CHANGE
OIL SOON message comes on within 10 months
since the vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II was
performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the CHANGE OIL SOON
message comes on 10 months or more since the last
service or if the message has not come on at all for
one year.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I
Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-15. Reset oil life system.
See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-20. An Emission Control Service.
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j).
•
•
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-21. See footnote (k).
•
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 5-65 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month on
page 6-9.
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels. If you have the 2.0L L4
supercharged engine, check intercooler fluid level. Add fluid as needed.
•
•
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in
this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
•
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
•
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
•
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
•
Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (l).
•
Inspect throttle system. See footnote (g).
•
6-5
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles (kilometers)
shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
(80 000)
75,000
(120 000)
100,000
(160 000)
125,000
(200 000)
150,000
(240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage
or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-21.
•
•
•
Change automatic transaxle fluid
and filter (severe service only).
See footnote (h).
•
•
•
Replace spark plugs. An Emission
Control Service.
•
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (m).
•
6-6
Maintenance Footnotes
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect drum brake linings/shoes for wear or
cracks. Inspect other brake parts, including drums,
wheel cylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts or
signs of wear. Inspect power steering cables for
proper hook-up, binding, cracks, chafing, etc.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace with genuine GM parts as
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking.
Replace wiper blades that appear worn or damaged
or that streak or miss areas of the windshield.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts
replaced. Also look for any opened or broken airbag
coverings, and have them repaired or replaced.
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, door hinges and
latches, hood hinges and latches and trunk lid hinges
and latches. More frequent lubrication may be required
when exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying
silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will
make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or
squeak.
(g) Check system for interference or binding and for
damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as needed.
Replace any components that have high effort or
excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator or cruise
control cables.
6-7
(h) Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing.
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer perform
this service. See Engine Coolant on page 5-24 for
what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,
pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure test the
cooling system and pressure cap.
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired and
the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
6-8
(k) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
(l) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
(m) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
Owner Checks and Services
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability, and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your GM Goodwrench® dealer can assist you
with these checks and services.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
At Each Fuel Fill
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the
windshield washer fluid reservoir and add the proper
fluid if necessary.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-15 for further
details.
Notice: It is important to check your oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep your
engine oil at the proper level can cause damage
to your engine not covered by your warranty.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-24 for further details.
Intercooler Coolant Level Check
(2.0L Supercharged Engine)
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
Visually inspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure they
are inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to
check the spare tire. See Tires on page 5-56 for further
details. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
securely. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-74.
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway
drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service
notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,
rotate the tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-65.
Check the coolant level and add DEX-COOL® coolant
mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant on page 5-24
for further details.
6-9
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control
System Check
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-27.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. On automatic transaxle vehicles, try to start the
engine in each gear. The vehicle should start only in
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle starts in
any other position, your vehicle needs service.
On manual transaxle vehicles, put the shift lever
in NEUTRAL (N), push the clutch down halfway, and
try to start the engine. The vehicle should start
only when the clutch is pushed down all the way to
the floor. If the vehicle starts when the clutch is
not pushed all the way down, your vehicle needs
service.
6-10
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-27.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN, but do
not start the engine. Without applying the regular
brake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P)
with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out
of PARK (P), your vehicle needs service.
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK in each shift lever position.
• With an automatic transaxle, the ignition should turn
to LOCK only when the shift lever is in PARK (P).
The key should come out only in LOCK.
• With a manual transaxle, the key should come out
only in LOCK.
Turn the steering wheel to the left and to the right.
It should only lock when turned to the right.
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle
Park (P) Mechanism Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL (N),
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular
brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the
parking brake only.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).
Then release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
6-11
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care
to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other
debris can collect.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification may be obtained from
your dealer.
Usage
Engine Oil
(2.2L and 2.4L
L4 engines)
6-12
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets
GM Standard GM6094M and
displays the American Petroleum
Institute (API) Certified for
Gasoline Engines starburst symbol.
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all
the requirements for your vehicle.
To determine the proper viscosity
for your vehicle’s engine, see
Engine Oil on page 5-15.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
The engine requires a special
engine oil meeting GM Standard
GM4718M. Oils meeting this
standard may be identified with the
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Certified for Gasoline Engines
Engine Oil
starburst symbol. However, not all
(2.0L L4
Supercharged synthetic API oils with the starburst
symbol will meet this GM standard.
engine)
You should look for and use only an
oil that meets GM Standard
GM4718M. GM Goodwrench® oil
meets all the requirements for your
vehicle. For the proper viscosity, see
Engine Oil on page 5-15.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
Engine Cooling water and use only DEX-COOL®
System
Coolant. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-24.
Intercooler
System
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
(2.0L L4
water and use only DEX-COOL®
Supercharged Coolant.
engine)
Usage
Hydraulic Brake
System
Hydraulic
Clutch System
Windshield
Washer
Parking Brake
Cable Guides
Manual
Transaxle
(2.2L and 2.4L
L4 engines)
Manual
Transaxle
(2.0L L4
Supercharged
engine)
Automatic
Transaxle
Key Lock
Cylinders
Fluid/Lubricant
Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. 12377985,
in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
DEXRON®-III Automatic
Transmission Fluid. Look for
“Approved for the H-Specification”
on the label.
Manual Transmission Fluid
(Part No. 21018899).
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Chassis Lubricant
Manual
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
Transaxle Shift Canada 88901242) or lubricant
Linkage
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Clutch Linkage Engine Oil.
Pivot Points
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
Chassis
Canada 88901242) or lubricant
Lubrication
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
Secondary
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in
Latch, Pivots, Canada 992723) or lubricant
Spring Anchor, meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
and
Category LB or GC-LB.
Release Pawl
Lubricant, Superlube
Hood and Door Multi-Purpose
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Hinges
Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, in
Canada 992887).
6-13
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your GM dealer.
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
GM Part Number
ACDelco® Part
Number
2.2L L4 and 2.4L L4 Engine
21999324
A2956C
2.0L L4 Engine Supercharged
15239447
A2975C
12579143
PF456G
2.2L L4 and 2.4L L4 Engine
12599232
41-981
2.0L L4 Engine Supercharged
12787099
PFR6T-10G
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
52493319
CF125
Driver’s Side — 22 inches (56 cm)
15243233
—
Passenger’s Side — 17 inches (43 cm)
15243232
—
Part
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Windshield Wiper Blade (Hook Type)
6-14
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
6-15
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
6-16
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
6-17
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
6-18
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Section 7
Customer Assistance and Information
Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2
Online Owner Center ......................................7-3
Customer Assistance for
Text Telephone (TTY) Users ..........................7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-4
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................7-5
Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-6
Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-7
Vehicle Data Collection and
Event Data Recorders ...................................7-9
Collision Damage Repair ................................7-10
Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-13
Reporting Safety Defects to
the United States Government .....................7-13
Reporting Safety Defects to
the Canadian Government ..........................7-14
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .....7-14
Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-14
7-1
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the operation of your
vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center by calling
1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GM of Canada
Customer Communication Centre by calling
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
7-2
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title,
or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel
and visible through the windshield.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
(kilometers).
When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the
BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for
information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Although you may be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action,
use of the program is free of charge and your case will
generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree
with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and
proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the following
address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age, mileage,
and other factors. General Motors reserves the right to
change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue its
participation in this program.
Online Owner Center
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in
one place.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner’s manual (United States only).
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members (United States only).
Refer to the web for updated information.
To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com
(United States) or My GM Canada within
www.gmcanada.com (Canada).
7-3
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate
with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer
wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet, refer to the
addresses below.
United States — Customer Assistance
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
www.Chevrolet.com
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
7-4
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Overseas — Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) — Customer Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details.
TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
7-5
Roadside Assistance Program
As the owner of a new Chevrolet vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Chevrolet Roadside
Assistance program. This value-added service is
intended to provide you with peace of mind as you drive
in the city or travel the open road. Call Chevrolet’s
Roadside Assistance at 1-800-CHEV-USA,
(1-800-243-8872) 24 hours a day, 365 days a year to
speak with a Chevrolet Roadside Assistance
representative.
We will provide the following services during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period, at no expense
to you:
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
($5 maximum) for the customer to get to the
nearest service station.
• Lock-out Service (identification required):
Replacement keys or locksmith service will be
covered at no charge if you are unable to gain entry
into your vehicle. Delivery of the replacement key will
be covered within 10 miles (16 km).
• Emergency Tow: Tow to the nearest dealership
for warranty service or in the event of a
vehicle-disabling accident. Assistance provided
when the vehicle is mired in sand, mud, or snow.
7-6
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire will be
covered at no charge. The customer is responsible
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not covered
by a warrantable failure.
• Jump Start: No-start occurrences which require a
battery jump start will be covered at no charge.
• Dealer Locator Service
In many instances, mechanical failures are covered
under Chevrolet’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty.
However, when other services are utilized, our Roadside
Assistance Representatives will explain any payment
obligations you might incur.
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
provide the following to the Roadside Assistance
Representative:
• Your name, home address, and home
telephone number.
• Telephone number of your location.
• Location of the vehicle.
• Model, year, color, and license plate number.
• Mileage, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),
and delivery date of the vehicle.
• Description of the problem.
While we hope you never have the occasion to use our
service, it is added security while traveling for you and
your family. Remember, we are only a phone call away.
Chevrolet Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA
(1-800-243-8872), text telephone (TTY) users, call
1-888-889-2438.
Courtesy Transportation
Chevrolet reserves the right to limit services or
reimbursement to an owner or driver when, in
Chevrolet’s judgement, the claims become excessive in
frequency or type of occurrence.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to
customers in conjunction with the Bumper-to-Bumper
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Several transportation options are available when
warranty repairs are required. This will reduce your
inconvenience during warranty repairs.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Chevrolet reserves the right to make any changes or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at
any time without notification.
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
roadside assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book.
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for new
vehicles.
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you should
contact your dealer and request an appointment. By
scheduling a service appointment and advising
your service consultant of your transportation needs,
your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, let
them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle off
for service, you are urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for the same day repair.
7-7
Transportation Options
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty
repair. Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum
amount per day and must be supported by receipts. This
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state, local and rental vehicle provider
requirements. Requirements vary and may include
minimum age requirements, insurance coverage, credit
card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage charges
and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,
usage fees, excessive mileage or rental usage beyond
the completion of the repair.
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes
one-way or round trip shuttle service to a destination
up to 10 miles (16 km) from the dealership.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement of public transportation expenses may
be available, for up to a maximum of five days. In
addition, should you arrange transportation through a
friend or relative, reimbursement for reasonable
fuel expenses may be available, up to a five-day
maximum. Claim amounts should reflect actual costs
and be supported by original receipts.
7-8
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it is
not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A separate
booklet entitled Warranty and Owner Assistance
Information furnished with each new vehicle provides
detailed warranty coverage information.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating
dealers and all program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at every dealer. Please
contact your dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during
the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the
General Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, alternative transportation may be available
under the Courtesy Transportation Program. Please
consult your dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has a
number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor
and control several aspects of the vehicle’s performance.
Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle computers to monitor
emission control components to optimize fuel economy,
to monitor conditions for airbag deployment and, if so
equipped, to provide anti-lock braking and to help the
driver control the vehicle in difficult driving situations.
Some information may be stored during regular
operations to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions;
other information is stored only in a crash event by
computer systems, such as those commonly called event
data recorders (EDR).
In a crash event, computer systems, such as the Airbag
Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in your vehicle
may record information about the condition of the vehicle
and how it was operated, such as data related to
engine speed, brake application, throttle position, vehicle
speed, safety belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag
performance, and the severity of a collision. This
information has been used to improve vehicle crash
performance and may be used to improve crash
performance of future vehicles and driving safety.
Unlike the data recorders on many airplanes, these
on-board systems do not record sounds, such as
conversation of vehicle occupants.
7-9
To read this information, special equipment is needed
and access to the vehicle or the device that stores
the data is required. GM will not access information
about a crash event or share it with others other than:
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,
• in response to an official request of police or similar
government office,
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the
discovery process, or
• as required by law.
In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may:
• use the data for GM research needs,
• make it available for research where appropriate
confidentiality is to be maintained and need is
shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a specific
vehicle with non-GM organizations for research
purposes.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have access to
the special equipment that can read the information
if they have access to the vehicle or the device
that stores the data.
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, please check
the OnStar® subscription service agreement or
manual for information on its operations and data
collection.
7-10
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs
will diminish your vehicle’s resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the
same materials and construction methods as the parts
with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM
Collision parts are your best choice to assure that your
vehicle’s designed appearance, durability and safety are
preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior accidents. In most
cases, the parts being recycled are from undamaged
sections of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment
GM part, may be an acceptable choice to maintain your
vehicle’s originally designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of these parts is not
known. Such parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related failures
are not covered by that warranty.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not have
been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts may
fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems,
and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions.
Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure related
to such parts are not covered by that warranty.
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your GM dealer may have a collision
repair center with GM-trained technicians and state
of the art equipment, or be able to recommend a
collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There
are significant differences in the quality of coverage
afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many
insurance policies provide reduced protection to your
GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs
by using aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance
companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that
you assure your vehicle will be repaired with
GM original equipment collision parts. If such insurance
coverage is not available from your current insurance
carrier, consider switching to another insurance carrier.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read
your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the
end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
If an Accident Occurs
Here is what to do if you are involved in an accident.
• Try to relax and then check to make sure you
are all right. If you are uninjured, make sure that no
one else in your vehicle, or the other vehicle, is
injured.
• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help. Do not
leave the scene of an accident until all matters have
been taken care of. Move your vehicle only if its
position puts you in danger or you are instructed to
move it by a police officer.
• Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the accident.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental
frame of mind, or anything unrelated to the
accident. This will help guard against post-accident
legal action.
7-11
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 7-6 for more information.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the
tow truck operator or write down the driver’s name,
the service’s name, and the phone number.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these items
in your vehicle.
• Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company and
policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
7-12
• If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the accident. They will walk you through the
information they will need. If they ask for a police
report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy
of the report for a nominal fee. In some states with
“no fault” insurance laws, a report may not be
necessary. This is especially true if there are no
injuries and both vehicles are driveable.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealer or a private
collision repair facility to fix the damage, make sure
you are comfortable with them. Remember, you will
have to feel comfortable with their work for a
long time.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
Managing the Vehicle Damage
Repair Process
Reporting Safety Defects
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your
GM vehicle warranty.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live
with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your
insurance company may initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts.
Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be
obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM
parts, even if your insurance coverage does not pay
the full cost.
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with
that company. In such cases, you can have control of
the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
400 Seventh Street, SW.
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
7-13
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may call them at
1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Transport Canada
Place de Ville Tower C
330 Sparks Street
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you will notify
General Motors. Please call the Chevrolet Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
7-14
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments, and specifications for
GM transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.
Service Bulletins
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
Service Publications are available for current and
past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service
Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General
Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483).
Owner’s Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include
the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
7-15
✍ NOTES
7-16
A
Accessories and Modifications ............................ 5-3
Accessory Power Outlet(s) ............................... 3-16
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6
Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 5-97
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-21
Air Conditioning .............................................. 3-17
Airbag
Passenger Status Indicator ........................... 3-26
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-25
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) ...... 7-9
Airbag System ................................................ 1-53
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ............................ 1-67
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-60
Passenger Sensing System ........................... 1-62
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-66
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-60
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .... 1-61
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-59
Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-56
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................... 4-7
Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .............. 3-30
Appearance Care
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels .............. 5-93
Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-91
Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 5-95
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................... 5-92
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle ................ 5-88
Appearance Care (cont.)
Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-90
Finish Care ................................................. 5-92
Finish Damage ............................................ 5-94
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and
Other Plastic Surfaces ............................... 5-91
Leather ...................................................... 5-90
Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 5-94
Tires .......................................................... 5-94
Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-95
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................ 5-95
Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-92
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-91
Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 5-93
Ashtray(s) ...................................................... 3-17
Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-48
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ...................... 3-71
Care of Your CD Player ............................... 3-72
Care of Your CDs ........................................ 3-72
Fixed Mast Antenna ..................................... 3-73
Radio with CD .................................... 3-50, 3-57
Setting the Time .......................................... 3-49
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................ 3-70
Understanding Radio Reception ..................... 3-71
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............ 3-73
Automatic Door Lock ......................................... 2-9
Automatic Transaxle
Fluid .......................................................... 5-23
Operation ................................................... 2-23
1
B
C
Battery .......................................................... 5-41
Run-Down Protection ................................... 3-16
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... 4-22
Boost Gage ................................................... 3-37
Brake
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................ 4-7
Emergencies ................................................ 4-9
Parking ...................................................... 2-27
System Warning Light .................................. 3-29
Brakes .......................................................... 5-38
Braking ........................................................... 4-6
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-9
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-17
Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-49
Back-Up Lamps ........................................... 5-54
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ........ 5-51
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-49
Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 5-46
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,
Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps ................. 5-50
Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-55
Taillamps and Turn Signal Lamps .................. 5-52
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps ................................. 5-53
Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-66
California Fuel .................................................. 5-6
California Proposition 65 Warning ....................... 5-3
Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-107
Carbon Monoxide ........... 2-10, 2-32, 4-26, 4-39, 4-46
Care of
Safety Belts ................................................ 5-91
Your CD Player ........................................... 3-72
Your CDs ................................................... 3-72
Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-37
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ........... 5-51
Chains, Tire ................................................... 5-72
Charging System Light .................................... 3-28
Check
Engine Light ............................................... 3-32
Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... 5-95
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-38
Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-34
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children .......... 1-43
Older Children ............................................. 1-32
Securing a Child Restraint in
a Rear Seat Position ................................ 1-48
Securing a Child Restraint in
the Right Front Seat Position ..................... 1-50
2
Child Restraints (cont.)
Where to Put the Restraint ...........................
Cigarette Lighter .............................................
Cleaning
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ..............
Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................................
Fabric/Carpet ..............................................
Finish Care .................................................
Inside of Your Vehicle ..................................
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and
Other Plastic Surfaces ..............................
Leather ......................................................
Tires ..........................................................
Underbody Maintenance ...............................
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................
Weatherstrips ..............................................
Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................
Climate Control System ...................................
Air Filter, Passenger Compartment .................
Outlet Adjustment ........................................
Clutch, Hydraulic .............................................
Collision Damage Repair ..................................
Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt .....................
Compact Spare Tire ........................................
1-42
3-17
5-93
5-92
5-90
5-92
5-88
5-91
5-90
5-94
5-95
5-92
5-91
5-93
3-17
3-20
3-20
5-23
7-10
1-28
5-88
Competitive Driving, Racing or Other ................. 4-17
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................... 2-14
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-6
Convenience Net ............................................ 2-37
Coolant
Engine Temperature Warning Light ................. 3-32
Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-22
Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............................. 5-29
Cooling System .............................................. 5-31
Cruise Control ................................................ 3-10
Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-37
Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-7
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users ............................... 7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-4
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ............... 7-5
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .... 7-14
Reporting Safety Defects to
the Canadian Government ......................... 7-14
Reporting Safety Defects to
the United States Government ................... 7-13
Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-6
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-14
3
D
E
Daytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-14
Differential, Limited-Slip .................................... 4-11
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4
Dome Lamp ................................................... 3-15
Door
Automatic Door Lock ..................................... 2-9
Delayed Locking ........................................... 2-8
Locks .......................................................... 2-7
Power Door Locks ......................................... 2-8
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock .............. 2-9
Rear Door Security Locks ............................... 2-9
Driver
Position, Safety Belt ..................................... 1-18
Seat Height Adjuster ...................................... 1-3
Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-38
DIC Operation and Displays .......................... 3-38
DIC Vehicle Personalization .......................... 3-43
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-40
Driver’s Storage Compartment .......................... 2-37
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 4-17
City ........................................................... 4-20
Defensive ..................................................... 4-2
Drunken ....................................................... 4-3
Freeway ..................................................... 4-21
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-24
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-18
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-31
Winter ........................................................ 4-26
Easy Entry Seat ............................................... 1-8
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment ...................................... 5-97
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ................. 5-101
Floor Console Fuse Block ............................. 5-99
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-98
Headlamp Wiring ......................................... 5-98
Power Windows and Other Power Options ...... 5-98
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................... 5-98
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-21
Battery ....................................................... 5-41
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-32
Coolant ...................................................... 5-24
Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-22
Coolant Temperature Warning Light ................ 3-32
Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5-12
Exhaust ..................................................... 2-32
Oil ............................................................. 5-15
Oil Life System ........................................... 5-20
Overheating ................................................ 5-29
Starting ...................................................... 2-20
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) ........................ 4-9
Warning Light ............................................. 3-31
Entry/Exit Lighting ........................................... 3-16
Event Data Recorders (EDR) ............................. 7-9
Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-31
4
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-21
Finish Damage ............................................... 5-94
Fixed Mast Antenna ........................................ 3-73
Flashers, Hazard Warning .................................. 3-6
Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-8
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-73
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-74
Flat Tire, Storing ............................................. 5-85
Fluid
Automatic Transaxle ..................................... 5-23
Manual Transaxle ........................................ 5-23
Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-37
Fog Lamp Light .............................................. 3-36
Fog Lamps .................................................... 3-15
Folding Rear Seat ........................................... 1-10
Fuel ............................................................... 5-5
Additives ...................................................... 5-6
California Fuel .............................................. 5-6
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 5-10
Filling Your Tank ........................................... 5-8
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-7
Fuel (cont.)
Gage ......................................................... 3-36
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-6
Fuses
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ................. 5-101
Floor Console Fuse Block ............................. 5-99
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-98
Windshield Wiper ......................................... 5-98
G
Gage
Boost ......................................................... 3-37
Fuel .......................................................... 3-36
Speedometer .............................................. 3-24
Tachometer ................................................. 3-24
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................ 5-5
Specifications ............................................... 5-6
Glove Box ..................................................... 2-37
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 7-5
5
H
I
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6
Head Restraints ............................................... 1-7
Headlamp
Aiming ....................................................... 5-46
Headlamp Wiring ............................................ 5-98
Headlamps .................................................... 3-13
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-49
Daytime Running Lamps ............................... 3-14
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-8
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-49
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,
Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps ................. 5-50
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8
On Reminder .............................................. 3-14
Wiper Activated ........................................... 3-14
Heated Seats ................................................... 1-4
Heater ........................................................... 3-17
Height Adjuster, Driver Seat ............................... 1-3
Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-36
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-23
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-24
Hood
Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10
Release ..................................................... 5-11
Horn ............................................................... 3-6
How to Use This Manual ...................................... ii
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-17
Hydraulic Clutch ............................................. 5-23
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-18
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-34
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 5-63
Instrument Panel
Overview ..................................................... 3-4
Instrument Panel (I/P)
Brightness .................................................. 3-15
Cluster ....................................................... 3-23
6
J
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-42
K
Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-3
Keys ............................................................... 2-2
L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall .....................................
Lamps
Battery Run-Down Protection .........................
Dome ........................................................
Fog ...........................................................
Mirror Reading ............................................
LATCH System
Child Restraints ...........................................
Light
Airbag Readiness ........................................
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ...................
Brake System Warning .................................
Charging System .........................................
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning .............
Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
Warning Light ..........................................
Fog Lamp ..................................................
Highbeam On .............................................
Malfunction Indicator ....................................
5-58
3-16
3-15
3-15
3-16
1-43
3-25
3-30
3-29
3-28
3-32
3-31
3-36
3-36
3-32
Light (cont.)
Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-35
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator .................. 3-26
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder .................... 3-25
Safety Belt Reminder ................................... 3-24
Security ..................................................... 3-36
Up-Shift ..................................................... 3-29
Lighting
Entry/Exit ................................................... 3-16
Limited-Slip Differential .................................... 4-11
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-31
Locks
Automatic Door Lock ..................................... 2-9
Delayed Locking ........................................... 2-8
Door ........................................................... 2-7
Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-10
Power Door .................................................. 2-8
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock .............. 2-9
Rear Door Security Locks ............................... 2-9
Loss of Control ............................................... 4-15
Lumbar
Manual Controls ............................................ 1-3
7
M
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6
At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-9
At Least Once a Month .................................. 6-9
At Least Once a Year .................................. 6-10
Introduction .................................................. 6-2
Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 6-7
Maintenance Record .................................... 6-15
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ......... 6-14
Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-8
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-12
Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4
Using .......................................................... 6-3
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-32
Manual Lumbar Controls .................................... 1-3
Manual Seats ................................................... 1-2
8
Manual Transaxle
Fluid .......................................................... 5-23
Operation ................................................... 2-26
Manual Windows ............................................ 2-13
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-40
Mirror Reading Lamps ..................................... 3-16
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview with OnStar® ..... 2-33
Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-33
Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-35
Outside Manual Mirror .................................. 2-34
Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-34
Outside Remote Control Mirror ...................... 2-34
MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-3
N
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-17
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ............ 6-14
O
P
Odometer ...................................................... 3-24
Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-13
Oil
Engine ....................................................... 5-15
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-35
Oil, Engine Oil Life System .............................. 5-20
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-32
Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-3
OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ............... 2-35
Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-6
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-20
Outlet(s), Accessory Power ............................... 3-16
Outside
Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-35
Manual Mirror ............................................. 2-34
Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-34
Remote Control Mirror .................................. 2-34
Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-8
Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii
Paint, Damage ............................................... 5-94
Park (P)
Shifting Into ................................................ 2-29
Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-30
Parking
Brake ........................................................ 2-27
Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-31
Parking Your Vehicle ....................................... 2-31
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................... 3-26
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ..................... 3-20
Passenger Sensing System .............................. 1-62
Passing ......................................................... 4-14
PASS-Key® III+ .............................................. 2-15
PASS-Key® III+ Operation ................................ 2-16
Power
Accessory Outlet(s) ...................................... 3-16
Door Locks .................................................. 2-8
Electrical System ......................................... 5-98
Retained Accessory (RAP) ............................ 2-20
Windows .................................................... 2-13
Pretensioners, Safety Belt ................................ 1-31
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ................. 2-9
9
Q
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-16
R
Racing or Other Competitive Driving .................. 4-17
Radios .......................................................... 3-48
Care of Your CD Player ............................... 3-72
Care of Your CDs ........................................ 3-72
Radio with CD .................................... 3-50, 3-57
Setting the Time .......................................... 3-49
Theft-Deterrent ............................................ 3-70
Understanding Reception .............................. 3-71
Rear Door Security Locks .................................. 2-9
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ...................... 1-28
Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .................. 1-25
Rearview Mirror, Automatic
Dimming with OnStar® ................................. 2-33
Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-33
Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-4
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-12
10
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-36
Remote Keyless Entry System ............................ 2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ............ 2-4
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire ................................ 5-80
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-75
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-55
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government .................................. 7-14
General Motors ........................................... 7-14
United States Government ............................ 7-13
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems .................... 1-68
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash .......................................... 1-68
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-20
Right Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts ...... 1-25
Roadside
Assistance Program ....................................... 7-6
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-31
Running the Engine While Parked ..................... 2-32
S
Safety Belt
Passenger Reminder Light ............................ 3-25
Pretensioners .............................................. 1-31
Reminder Light ............................................ 3-24
Safety Belts
Care of ...................................................... 5-91
Driver Position ............................................ 1-18
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-17
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ..... 1-16
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ................... 1-28
Rear Seat Passengers ................................. 1-25
Right Front Passenger Position ...................... 1-25
Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-31
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-25
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ....................... 1-12
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 1-24
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii
Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4
Seats
Driver Seat Height Adjuster ............................. 1-3
Easy Entry Seat ............................................ 1-8
Head Restraints ............................................ 1-7
Heated Seats ............................................... 1-4
Manual ........................................................ 1-2
Manual Lumbar ............................................. 1-3
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-4
Split Folding Rear Seat ................................ 1-10
Securing a Child Restraint
Rear Seat Position ...................................... 1-48
Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-50
Security Light ................................................. 3-36
Service ........................................................... 5-3
Accessories and Modifications ......................... 5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle .......................................... 5-5
California Proposition 65 Warning .................... 5-3
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4
Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-32
Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-14
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-66
Setting the Time ............................................. 3-49
Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-94
Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-29
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-30
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-8
Spare Tire
Compact .................................................... 5-88
Installing .................................................... 5-80
Removing ................................................... 5-75
Storing ....................................................... 5-85
Specifications, Capacities ............................... 5-107
Speedometer .................................................. 3-24
Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-20
Steering ........................................................ 4-11
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ......................... 3-71
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-7
11
Storage Areas
Center Console Storage Area ........................
Convenience Net .........................................
Cupholder(s) ...............................................
Driver’s Storage Compartment .......................
Glove Box ..................................................
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow .....................
Sun Visors .....................................................
Sunroof .........................................................
2-37
2-37
2-37
2-37
2-37
4-30
2-13
2-38
T
Tachometer .................................................... 3-24
Taillamps
Turn Signal Lamps ...................................... 5-52
Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps ........................................ 5-53
Theft-Deterrent, Radio ..................................... 3-70
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-14
Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-14
PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 2-15
PASS-Key® III+ Operation ............................. 2-16
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-7
Tires ............................................................. 5-56
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated
Wheels, Cleaning ..................................... 5-93
Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-66
Chains ....................................................... 5-72
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-74
12
Tires (cont.)
Cleaning .................................................... 5-94
Compact Spare Tire ..................................... 5-88
Different Size .............................................. 5-68
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-73
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 5-63
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-65
Installing the Spare Tire ................................ 5-80
Removing the Flat Tire ................................. 5-80
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............... 5-75
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............ 5-85
Tire Sidewall Labeling .................................. 5-58
Tire Terminology and Definitions .................... 5-60
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-68
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-70
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-70
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-66
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-36
Towing a Trailer .................................. 4-39, 4-46
Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-36
Traction
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) .................... 4-9
Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
Warning Light .......................................... 3-31
Limited-Slip Differential ................................. 4-11
Transaxle
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-23
Fluid, Manual .............................................. 5-23
Transaxle Operation, Automatic ......................... 2-23
Transaxle Operation, Manual ............................ 2-26
Transmission
Up-Shift Light .............................................. 3-29
Trunk ............................................................ 2-10
Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-8
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7
U
Understanding Radio Reception ........................ 3-71
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-68
Up-Shift Light ................................................. 3-29
V
Vehicle
Control ........................................................ 4-6
Damage Warnings ........................................... iv
Loading ...................................................... 4-31
Parking Your ............................................... 2-31
Symbols ......................................................... iv
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data Recorders ... 7-9
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ............................................. 5-96
Service Parts Identification Label ................... 5-97
Vehicle Personalization
DIC ........................................................... 3-43
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-20
Visors ........................................................... 2-13
13
W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-22
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-40
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6
Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-6
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii
Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-70
Different Size .............................................. 5-68
Replacement ............................................... 5-70
Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-42
Windows ....................................................... 2-12
Manual ...................................................... 2-13
Power ........................................................ 2-13
Windshield
Washer ...................................................... 3-10
Washer Fluid .............................................. 5-37
Wiper Blade Replacement ............................. 5-55
Wiper Blades, Cleaning ................................ 5-93
Wiper Fuses ............................................... 5-98
Wipers ......................................................... 3-9
Winter Driving ................................................ 4-26
Wiper Activated Headlamps .............................. 3-14
X
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ................ 3-73
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2
14
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising